FCC ID: AZ492FT7035 Mobile 2-Way Radio

 

6881095C99-G.book Page 1 Friday, October 16, 2009 11:52 PM Product Safety and RF Energy Exposure Booklet for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed in Vehicles or as Fixed Site Control Stations ATTENTION!

BEFORE USING THIS RADIO, READ THIS BOOKLET WHICH CONTAINS IMPORTANT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE USAGE AND RF ENERGY AWARENESS AND CONTROL INFORMATION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH RF ENERGY EXPOSURE LIMITS IN APPLICABLE NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS. The information provided in this document supersedes the general safety information contained in user guides published prior to January 2008. 2005 2009 by Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. 10/09 1301 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.

*NNTN7851B*

NNTN7851B

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-G English 6881095C99-G.book Page 2 Friday, October 16, 2009 11:52 PM RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information, and Operational Instructions for FCC Occupational Use Requirements NOTICE: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. This two-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses radio frequency (RF) energy or radio waves to send and receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited to, sunlight and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other forms of electromagnetic energy, which when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop standards for safe exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins of protection. All Motorola two-way radios are designed, manufactured, and tested to ensure they meet government-established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend specific operating instructions to users of two-way radios. These instructions are important because they inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. English 2 6881095C99-G.book Page 3 Friday, October 16, 2009 11:52 PM Please refer to the following Web sites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control your exposure to assure compliance with established RF exposure limits. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Federal Communication Commission Regulations The FCC rules require manufacturers to comply with the FCC RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before they can be marketed in the U.S. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be facilitated by the use of a label directing users to specific user awareness information. Your Motorola two-way radio has a RF exposure product label. Also, your Motorola user manual, or separate safety booklet, includes information and operating instructions required to control your RF exposure and to satisfy compliance requirements. Compliance with RF Exposure Standard Your Motorola two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of national and international standards and guidelines (listed below) regarding human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. This radio complies with the IEEE and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/controlled RF exposure environment at duty factors of up to 50% talk-50% listen and is authorized by the FCC for occupational use. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with the FCC exposure guidelines, your radio antenna radiates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting (during talking), not when it is receiving (listening) or in standby mode. 3 English 6881095C99-G.book Page 4 Friday, October 16, 2009 11:52 PM Your Motorola two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47CFR part 2 sub-part J American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95. 1-1992 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1999 Edition Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-2005 Edition International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998 Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Radiation - Human Exposure) Standard, 2003 ANATEL, Brasil Regulatory Authority, Resolution 256 (April 11, 2001) additional requirements for SMR, cellular, and PCS product certification RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions To control exposure to yourself and others and to ensure compliance with the RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following procedures. Guidelines:

User awareness instructions should accompany device when transferred to other users. DO NOT use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. English 4 6881095C99-G.book Page 5 Friday, October 16, 2009 11:52 PM Instructions:

Transmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50% of the time. To transmit

(talk), push the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button or, for radios equipped with VOX, speak into the microphone. The red LED will illuminate when the radio is transmitting. To receive calls, release the PTT button, or, for radios equipped with VOX, stop talking. The red LED will extinguish when the radio stops transmitting. Transmitting 50% of the time, or less, is important because this radio generates measurable RF energy exposure only when transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards compliance). Transmit only when people outside the vehicle are at least the recommended minimum lateral distance away, as shown in Table 1, from the body of a vehicle with a properly installed antenna. This separation distance will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed

(according to installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the RF exposure requirements in the standards listed above. NOTE: Table 1 below lists the recommended lateral distance for people in an uncontrolled environment from the body of a vehicle with an approved, properly installed transmitting antenna (i.e., monopoles over a ground plane, or dipoles) at several different ranges of rated radio power for mobile radios installed in a vehicle. Table 1. Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Mobile Two-Way Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Note) Less than 7 watts 7 to 14 watts 15 to 39 watts 40 to 110 watts Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body 8 inches (20 centimeters) 1 foot (30 centimeters) 2 feet (60 centimeters) 3 feet (90 centimeters) 5 English 6881095C99-G.book Page 6 Friday, October 16, 2009 11:52 PM When a mobile radio is used in conjunction with another co-located transmitter such as a Vehicular Repeater, it is the vehicle operators responsibility to take appropriate steps to keep bystanders at the required separation distance from the vehicle to ensure compliance with the FCC's RF energy exposure limits for the general population. See the co-located transmitters user manual for more details. NOTE: If you are not sure of the rated power of your radio, contact your Motorola representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you can not determine the rated power out, then assure 3-feet separation from the body of the vehicle. The maximum power shown on the FCC Grant may be higher than the rated power allowing for production variation. Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines These mobile antenna installation guidelines are limited to metal body motor vehicles or vehicles with appropriate ground planes. Antennas should be installed in the center area of the roof or the trunk lid taking into account exposure conditions of backseat passengers and according to the specific instructions and restrictions in the Radio Installation Manual along with the requirements of the antenna supplier. Trunk lid installations are limited to vehicles with clearly defined flat trunk lids, and in some cases, to specific radio models and antennas. See the Radio Installation Manual for specific information on how and where to install specific types of approved antennas to facilitate recommended operating distances to all potentially exposed persons. Use only the Motorola-approved, supplied antenna or a Motorola-

approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. English 6 6881095C99-G.book Page 7 Friday, October 16, 2009 11:52 PM Approved Accessories This radio has been tested and meets RF Safety Standards when used with the Motorola accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and accessories please refer to the Users manual. Additional Information For additional information on exposure requirements or other training information, visit http://www.motorola.com/rfhealth. Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed on page 4:

The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. For additional installation information, see the guidelines for minimum separation distances provided above in the RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions section of this document. 7 English 6881095C99-G.book Page 8 Friday, October 16, 2009 11:52 PM Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. It may be necessary to conduct compatibility testing to determine if any electronic equipment used in or around vehicles or near fixed site antenna is sensitive to external RF energy or if any procedures need to be followed to eliminate or mitigate the potential for interaction between the radio transmitter and the equipment or device. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles To avoid possible interaction between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission controls, the radio should be installed only by an experienced installer and the following precautions should be used when installing the radio:

1. Refer to the manufacturers instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2. Before installing the radio, determine the location of the electronic control modules and their harnesses in the vehicle. 3. Route all radio wiring, including the antenna transmission line, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated wiring. English 8 6881095C99-G.book Page 9 Friday, October 16, 2009 11:52 PM Driver Safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of radios in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using your radio while driving, please:

Give full attention to driving and to the road. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Operational Warnings W A R N I N G For Vehicles with an Air Bag DO NOT mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. 9 English 6881095C99-G.book Page 10 Friday, October 16, 2009 11:52 PM W A R N I N G Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. For radios installed in vehicles fueled by liquefied petroleum gas, refer to the (U.S.) National Fire Protection Association standard, NFPA 58, for storage, handling, and/or container information. For a copy of the LP-gas standard, NFPA 58, contact the National Fire Protection Association, One Battery Park, Quincy, MA. English 10

 

 

Product Safety and RF Energy Exposure Booklet for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed in Vehicles or as Fixed Site Control Stations ATTENTION!

BEFORE USING THIS RADIO, READ THIS BOOKLET WHICH CONTAINS IMPORTANT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE USAGE AND RF ENERGY AWARENESS AND CONTROL INFORMATION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH RF ENERGY EXPOSURE LIMITS IN APPLICABLE NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS. The information provided in this document supersedes the general safety information contained in user guides published prior to February 2002. Motorola, Inc. 2005 8000 W. Sunrise Blvd., Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33322

*6881095C99*

68P81095C99-E English RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information, and Operational Instructions for FCC Occupational Use Requirements NOTICE: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. This 2-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses radio frequency (RF) energy or radio waves to send and receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited to, sunlight and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other forms of electromagnetic energy, which when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop standards for safe exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins of protection. All Motorola 2-way radios are designed, manufactured, and tested to ensure they meet government-established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend specific operating instructions to users of 2-way radios. These instructions are important because they inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. English 2 Please refer to the following Web sites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control your exposure to assure compliance with established RF exposure limits. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Federal Communication Commission Regulations The FCC rules require manufacturers to comply with the FCC RF energy exposure limits for mobile 2-way radios before they can be marketed in the U.S. When 2-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be facilitated by the use of a label directing users to specific user awareness information. Your Motorola 2-way radio has a RF exposure product label. Also, your Motorola user manual, or separate safety booklet, includes information and operating instructions required to control your RF exposure and to satisfy compliance requirements. Compliance with RF Exposure Standard Your Motorola two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of national and international standards and guidelines (listed below) regarding human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. This radio complies with the IEEE and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/controlled RF exposure environment at duty factors of up to 50% talk-50% listen and is authorized by the FCC for occupational use. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with the FCC exposure guidelines, your radio antenna radiates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting (during talking), not when it is receiving (listening) or in standby mode. 3 English Your Motorola two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47CFR part 2 sub-part J

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95. 1-1992 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1999 Edition International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998

Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999

Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Radiation - Human Exposure) Standard, 2003

ANATEL, Brasil Regulatory Authority, Resolution 256 (April 11, 2001) additional requirements for SMR, cellular, and PCS product certification. RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions To control exposure to yourself and others and to ensure compliance with the RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following procedures. Guidelines:

User awareness instructions should accompany device when transferred to other users.

Do not use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. Instructions:

T ransmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50% of the time. To transmit

(talk), push the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button or, for radios equipped with VOX, speak into the microphone. The red LED will illuminate when the radio is English 4

transmitting. To receive calls, release the PTT button, or, for radios equipped with VOX, stop talking. The red LED will extinguish when the radio stops transmitting. Transmitting 50% of the time, or less, is important because this radio generates measurable RF energy exposure only when transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards compliance).

Transmit only when people outside the vehicle are at least the recommended minimum lateral distance away, as shown in Table 1, from the body of a vehicle with a properly installed antenna. This separation distance will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed

(according to installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the RF exposure requirements in the standards listed above. NOTE: Table 1 below lists the recommended lateral distance for people in an uncontrolled environment from the body of a vehicle with an approved, properly installed transmitting antenna (i.e., monopoles over a ground plane, or dipoles) at several different ranges of rated radio power for mobile radios installed in a vehicle. Table 1. Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Mobile Two-Way Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Note) Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Less than 7 watts 8 inches (20 centimeters) 7 to 15 watts 16 to 39 watts 40 to 110 watts 1 foot (30 centimeters) 2 feet (60 centimeters) 3 feet (90 centimeters)

When a mobile radio is used in conjunction with another co-located transmitter such as a Vehicular Repeater, it is the vehicle operators responsibility to take appropriate steps to keep bystanders at the required separation distance from the vehicle to ensure compliance with the FCC's RF energy exposure limits for the general population. See the co-located transmitters user manual for more details. 5 English NOTE: If you are not sure of the rated power of your radio, contact your Motorola representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you can not determine the rated power out, then assure 3-feet separation from the body of the vehicle. The maximum power shown on the FCC Grant may be higher than the rated power allowing for production variation. Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines

These mobile antenna installation guidelines are limited to metal body motor vehicles or vehicles with appropriate ground planes.

Antennas should be installed in the center ar ea of the roof or the trunk lid taking into account exposure conditions of backseat passengers and according to the specific instructions and restrictions in the Radio Installation Manual along with the requirements of the antenna supplier.

Trunk lid installations are limited to vehi cles with clearly defined flat trunk lids, and in some cases, to specific radio models and antennas. See the Radio Installation Manual for specific information on how and where to install specific types of approved antennas to facilitate recommended operating distances to all potentially exposed persons.

Use only the Motorola-approved, supplied antenna or a Motorola-

approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. Approved Accessories

This radio has been tested and meets RF Safety Standards when used with the Motorola accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards.

For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, vi sit the following Web site, which lists approved accessories for your radio model:

http://www.motorola.com/cgiss/index.shtml. English 6 Additional Information For additional information on exposure requirements or other training information, visit http://www.motorola.com/rfhealth. Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed on page 4:

The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible.

As with all fixed site antenna installations , it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded.

For additional installation information, see the guidelines for minimum separation distances provided above in the RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions section of this document. Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. It may be necessary to conduct compatibility testing to determine if any electronic equipment used in or around vehicles or near fixed site antenna is sensitive to external RF energy or if any procedures need to be followed to eliminate or mitigate the potential for interaction between the radio transmitter and the equipment or device. 7 English Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles To avoid possible interaction between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission controls, the radio should be installed only by an experienced installer and the following precautions should be used when installing the radio:

1. Refer to the manufacturers instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2. Before installing the radio, determine the location of the electronic control modules and their harnesses in the vehicle. 3. Route all radio wiring, including the antenna transmission line, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated wiring. Driver Safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of radios in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using your radio while driving, please:

Give full attention to driving and to the road.

Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. English 8 Operational Warnings

W A R N I N G For Vehicles with an Air Bag Do not mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. 9 English

W A R N I N G Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. For radios installed in vehicles fueled by liquefied petroleum gas, refer to the (U.S.) National Fire Protection Association standard, NFPA 58, for storage, handling, and/or container information. For a copy of the LP-gas standard, NFPA 58, contact the National Fire Protection Association, One Battery Park, Quincy, MA. English 10 Folleto de normas de seguridad y de exposicin a la energa de RF al usar radios bidireccionales mviles instalados en vehculos o estaciones de control en emplazamientos fijos ATENCIN ANTES DE USAR EL RADIO LEA ESTE FOLLETO, EL CUAL CONTIENE INSTRUCCIONES DE OPERACIN IMPORTANTES PARA SU USO SEGURO, AS COMO INFORMACIN SOBRE LA ENERGA DE RF Y SU CONTROL, PARA GARANTIZAR SU CONFORMIDAD CON LOS LMITES DE EXPOSICIN A LA ENERGA DE RADIOFRECUENCIA ESTABLECIDOS EN LAS NORMAS NACIONALES E INTERNACIONALES APLICABLES. La informacin incluida en este documento reemplaza la informacin de seguridad general contenida en los manuales de usuario publicados antes de febrero de 2002. Motorola, Inc. 2005 8000 W. Sunrise Blvd., Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33322, EE.UU.

*6881095C99*

68P81095C99-E Espaol Informacin sobre exposicin a la energa de RF y su control, e instrucciones operacionales para satisfacer los requisitos de la FCC sobre el uso como herramienta ocupacional AVISO: Este radio est diseado para uso en ambientes ocupacionales controlados, donde los usuarios estn plenamente conscientes de la exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia a la que estn sujetos, y pueden ejercer control sobre dicha exposicin para mantenerse dentro de los lmites establecidos por la FCC. Esta unidad de radio NO est aprobada para la venta al pblico en general en el mercado de consumo masivo, ni para uso en entornos diferentes al aqu descrito. Este radio bidireccional usa energa electromagntica en el espectro de radiofrecuencia (RF) para permitir las comunicaciones a distancia entre dos o ms usuarios. El mismo emplea la energa de radiofrecuencia u ondas de radio para enviar y recibir llamadas. La energa de RF es una forma de energa electromagntica. Este tipo de energa se presenta en otras formas, entre las que se encuentran la luz solar y los rayos X. La energa de RF, sin embargo, no debe confundirse con estas otras formas de energa electromagntica que, cuando son usadas indebidamente, pueden ocasionar daos biolgicos. Niveles muy elevados de rayos X, por ejemplo, pueden producir daos en tejidos y en material gentico. Expertos en las ciencias, la ingeniera, la medicina, la salud y la industria trabajan conjuntamente con diferentes organizaciones con el fin de desarrollar normas que definan lmites prudentes de exposicin a la energa de RF. Estas normas proporcionan los niveles recomendados de exposicin a la RF, tanto para los trabajadores como para el pblico en general. Estos niveles recomendados de exposicin a la RF incluyen mrgenes de seguridad suficientemente amplios. Todos los radios bidireccionales Motorola son diseados, fabricados y probados de manera que aseguren el cumplimiento de los niveles de exposicin a la RF establecidos por los organismos pblicos reguladores. Asimismo, los fabricantes recomiendan a los usuarios de radios bidireccionales seguir instrucciones de operacin especficas. Estas instrucciones son importantes, ya que informan a los usuarios acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF y proporcionan procedimientos sencillos para su control. Espaol 2 Visite los siguientes sitios Web para obtener ms informacin acerca de qu es la exposicin a la energa de RF y cmo controlar dicha exposicin para garantizar la observancia de los lmites de exposicin establecidos. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Regulaciones de la Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. Las normas de la FCC estipulan que los fabricantes de radios mviles bidireccionales no podrn comercializar sus productos en los EE.UU., a menos que los mismos cumplan con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF establecidos por la FCC. Cuando la naturaleza del trabajo requiere el uso de radios bidireccionales, la FCC exige que los usuarios estn totalmente conscientes de los efectos de la exposicin, y que sean capaces de controlar el nivel de exposicin al que se someten, a fin de satisfacer los requisitos laborales. La informacin sobre exposicin puede facilitarse mediante el uso de una etiqueta que remita a los usuarios a la fuente de informacin apropiada. Su radio bidireccional Motorola tiene una etiqueta con informacin acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF. Adems, en el manual de usuario del producto Motorola, o en un folleto de seguridad separado, se incluye la informacin e instrucciones de operacin necesarias para controlar la exposicin a la energa de RF y para garantizar el cumplimiento de las normas. Conformidad con la normativa sobre exposicin a la RF Este radio bidireccional Motorola ha sido diseado y verificado con el fin de garantizar su compatibilidad con las siguientes normas y recomendaciones nacionales e internacionales relacionadas con la exposicin de seres humanos a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Este radio cumple con los lmites de exposicin establecidos por el IEEE y por la ICNIRP para entornos ocupacionales o con control de exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia, a ciclos de trabajo de hasta 50% (50% transmisin y 50% recepcin) y ha sido aprobado por la FCC para uso como herramienta ocupacional. En lo que respecta a la medicin de energa de RF para la determinacin de conformidad con las directrices de exposicin de la FCC, la antena del radio irradia energa de RF medible slo cuando est transmitiendo (cuando el usuario est hablando), no cuando est recibiendo (cuando el usuario est oyendo) o cuando se encuentra en espera. 3 Espaol Este radio bidireccional Motorola satisface las siguientes normas y recomendaciones relacionadas con la exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia:

Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. (FCC), Cdigo de Reglamentos Federales; 47 CFR, Parte 2, Subparte J Instituto Nacional Americano de Normas (ANSI) / Instituto de Ingenieros Elctricos y Electrnicos (IEEE) C95. 1-1992 Instituto de Ingenieros Elctricos y Electrnicos (IEEE) (C95.1 Edicin 1999).

Comisin Internacional para la Proteccin contra la Radiacin no Ionizante

(ICNIRP) 1998.

Ministerio de Sanidad (Canad), Cdigo de seguridad 6. Lmites de la exposicin humana a los campos electromagnticos de radiofrecuencia en el rango de frecuencias de 3 kHz a 300 GHz (1999).

Direccin Australiana de Comunicaciones, Normativa de Radiocomunicaciones de 2003 (exposicin humana a la radiacin electromagntica).

ANATEL, organismo regulador de Brasil, Resolucin 256 (11 de abril de 2001) requisitos adicionales para la certificacin de productos SMR, celulares y PCS. Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF e instrucciones de operacin Para controlar la exposicin a la que tanto Ud. como otras personas se someten, y para asegurar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a la RF, observe siempre los siguientes procedimientos. Pautas:

El aparato debe ser acompaado de la informacin sobre la energa de RF cuando el mismo sea transferido a otros usuarios.

No use este dispositivo sin antes satisfacer los requisitos operacionales aqu descritos. Instrucciones:

No transmita ms del 50% del tiempo, a fin de no sobrepasar el mximo ciclo de trabajo especificado del 50%. Para transmitir (hablar) presione el botn de transmisin (PTT); si el radio est equipado con VOX, hable hacia el micrfono. El LED rojo se enciende cuando el radio est transmitiendo. Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. Si el radio est equipado con VOX, deje de hablar. El LED rojo se apaga cuando el radio termina de transmitir. Es importante no transmitir ms del Espaol 4

50% del tiempo, ya que este radio emite energa de RF medible slo cuando est transmitiendo (en trminos de conformidad con las normas de medicin).

Transmita nicamente cuando las personas que se encuentran fuera del vehculo estn apartadas por lo menos la distancia lateral mnima recomendada (indicada en la Tabla 1) de la carrocera de un vehculo equipado con una antena debidamente instalada. Esta separacin asegura que haya suficiente distancia entre una antena exterior debidamente instalada (segn las instrucciones de instalacin) para satisfacer los requisitos de exposicin a la energa de RF estipulados en las normas antes mencionadas. NOTA: La Tabla 1 presentada a continuacin indica la distancia lateral recomendada, en un entorno no controlado, a la que los transentes deben mantenerse de la carrocera de un vehculo equipado con una antena transmisora aprobada y debidamente instalada (es decir, monopolos sobre un plano de tierra, o bipolos) para diferentes niveles de potencia nominal de radios mviles instalados en un vehculo. Tabla 1. Potencia nominal del radio bidireccional mvil instalado en un vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada de la carrocera del vehculo Potencia nominal del radio mvil

(ver nota) Distancia lateral mnima de la carrocera del vehculo Menos de 7 vatios 7 a 15 vatios 16 a 39 vatios 40 a 110 vatios 20 centmetros (8 pulg.) 30 centmetros (1 pie) 60 centmetros (2 pies) 90 centmetros (3 pies)

Cuando se usa un radio mvil conjuntamente con otro transmisor ubicado en el mismo sitio como, por ejemplo, un repetidor vehicular, el operador del vehculo es responsible de tomar las medidas necesarias para mantener a los transentes alejados del vehculo la distancia mnima requerida, a fin de garantizar la conformidad con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF establecidos por la FCC para la poblacin en general. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte el manual de usuario de los transmisores ubicados en el mismo sitio. 5 Espaol NOTA: Si no est seguro de cul es la potencia nominal de su radio, comunquese con el representante o concesionario Motorola e indquele el nmero de modelo del radio que aparece en la etiqueta del radio. Si no puede determinar la potencia nominal de salida, asegrese de mantener una separacin de un metro (3 pies) de la carrocera del vehculo. La potencia mxima mostrada en la autorizacin de la FCC puede ser mayor que la potencia nominal, tomando en consideracin las variaciones que ocurren a nivel de produccin. Pautas para la instalacin de antenas de radios mviles

Las siguientes pautas para la instalacin de antenas de radios mviles son aplicables nicamente a vehculos automotores con carrocera metlica o a vehculos con planos de tierra apropiados.

Las antenas deben ser instaladas en el rea central del techo o de la tapa del compartimiento de equipaje, tomando en consideracin las condiciones de exposicin de los pasajeros que viajen en el asiento trasero, as como las instrucciones y restricciones especficas mencionadas en el manual de instalacin del radio y los requisitos establecidos por el proveedor de la antena.

La instalacin en la tapa del compartimiento de equipaje queda limitada a aquellos vehculos cuya tapa del compartimiento de equipaje sea una superficie plana claramente definida y, en algunos casos, a modelos especficos de radios y antenas. Consulte en el manual de instalacin del radio la informacin especfica sobre la ubicacin y la forma de instalar los diferentes tipos de antenas aprobados para satisfacer las distancias de operacin recomendadas entre las antenas y toda persona que pueda quedar expuesta.

Use nicamente la antena Motorola suministrada o una antena de reemplazo aprobada por Motorola. El uso de antenas, modificaciones o accesorios no aprobados podra daar el radio y constituir una violacin de las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF. Accesorios aprobados

Este radio ha sido probado y se ha determinado que satisface las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF siempre que se use con los accesorios Motorola suministrados o designados para este producto. El uso de otros accesorios puede constituir una violacin de las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF.

Para consultar la lista de antenas aprobadas por Motorola visite el siguiente sitio Web que contiene una lista de accesorios aprobados para su modelo de radio:

http://www.motorola.com/cgiss/index.shtml. Espaol 6 Informacin adicional Para obtener informacin adicional sobre los requisitos de exposicin o informacin sobre capacitacin, visite http://www.motorola.com/rfhealth. Pautas de control y conformidad, e instrucciones de operacin de radios bidireccionales mviles instalados como estaciones de control en emplazamientos fijos Si un equipo de radio mvil se instala en un lugar fijo y se hace funcionar como estacin de control o como unidad fija, la instalacin de la antena deber satisfacer los siguientes requisitos, a fin de garantizar un rendimiento ptimo y de cumplir con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia establecidos en las normas y pautas enumeradas en la pgina 4:

La antena se debe montar fuera del edificio, en el techo o en una torre, siempre que sea posible.

Como en todas las instalaciones de antenas en emplazamientos fijos, es responsabilidad del portador de la licencia mantener el emplazamiento de conformidad con los reglamentos aplicables, y es posible que existan requisitos adicionales como mediciones de propagacin, colocacin de letreros y restricciones de acceso al emplazamiento.

Para obtener informacin adicional sobre la instalacin, consulte las directrices relativas a las distancias de separacin antes mencionadas en la seccin de este documento titulada Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF, e instrucciones de operacin. Interferencia y compatibilidad electromagntica NOTA: Casi todos los dispositivos electrnicos son susceptibles a la interferencia electromagntica si no cuentan con el debido blindaje, o si no estn diseados o configurados de manera que sean compatibles con este tipo de seales electromagnticas. Puede que sea necesario realizar pruebas de compatibilidad para determinar si alguno de los equipos electrnicos usados en los vehculos, cerca de ellos o cerca de antenas en emplazamientos fijos, es sensible a la energa de radiofrecuencia externa, o si hay que ejecutar algn procedimiento para eliminar o reducir la posibilidad de interaccin entre el radio transmisor y el equipo o dispositivo. 7 Espaol Edificaciones Para evitar problemas de interferencia y/o compatibilidad electromagntica, apague el radio en todos los lugares donde haya letreros que as lo establezcan. Por ejemplo, en hospitales e instalaciones de asistencia mdica podran estar usando aparatos sensibles a la energa de RF externa. Vehculos Para evitar una posible interaccin entre el radio transmisor y cualquiera de los mdulos de control electrnico del vehculo (por ejemplo, el control del sistema antibloqueo de frenos (ABS), el control del motor o el control de la transmisin), se debe contratar a un instalador experimentado para realizar la instalacin del radio, as como tomar las siguientes precauciones:

1. Consulte las instrucciones proporcionadas por el fabricante y dems boletines tcnicos que contengan recomendaciones para la instalacin del radio. 2. Antes de instalar el radio, determine la ubicacin de los mdulos de control electrnico y del tendido de los cables del vehculo. 3. Haga pasar todo el cableado del radio, incluida la lnea de transmisin de la antena, lo ms lejos posible de las unidades de control electrnico y del tendido de cables correspondiente. Seguridad al conducir Consulte las leyes y reglamentos para el uso de radios en las zonas donde conduce. Obedzcalas siempre. Cuando utilice el radio al conducir un vehculo:

Preste atencin al camino y a las condiciones de conduccin.

Salga del camino y estacione el vehculo antes de realizar o contestar una llamada, si la situacin lo amerita. Espaol 8 Advertencias operacionales

ADVERTENCIA W A R N I N G Vehculos con bolsas de aire No instale ni coloque un radio mvil sobre una bolsa de aire ni en el rea de despliegue de la misma. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con mucha fuerza. Si se coloca un radio en el rea de despliegue de la bolsa de aire, cuando sta se infle el radio podra salir proyectado con gran velocidad y ocasionar lesiones graves a los pasajeros. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos Apague el radio antes de entrar en reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas. Las chispas en atmsferas potencialmente explosivas pueden desencadenar explosiones o incendios, y ocasionar lesiones e incluso la muerte. Entre los entornos potencialmente explosivos se encuentran las reas con combustible, por ejemplo, debajo de la cubierta de barcos, instalaciones de transferencia y almacenamiento de combustible o de productos qumicos, y reas donde el aire contiene productos qumicos o partculas tales como polvo de cereales, polvo comn o polvo metlico. En las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas generalmente hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. 9 Espaol

ADVERTENCIA W A R N I N G reas de voladuras y explosivos Para evitar una posible interferencia con las operaciones de detonacin, apague el radio cuando est cerca de detonadores elctricos, en un rea de detonaciones o donde haya letreros que indiquen apagar los radios bidireccionales. Obedezca todas las seales e instrucciones. Para el caso de radios instalados en vehculos propulsados por gas licuado de petrleo, consulte la norma NFPA 58 de la Asociacin nacional estadounidense de proteccin contra incendios (National Fire Protection Association) para obtener informacin sobre almacenamiento, manejo y/o contenedores. Para obtener una copia de la norma NFPA 58 comunquese con la Asociacin nacional estadounidense de proteccin contra incendios (National Fire Protection Association), One Battery Park, Quincy, MA, EE.UU. Espaol 10 Folheto de normas de segurana e de exposio energia de RF quando da utilizao de rdios bidirecionais mveis instalados em veculos ou estaes de controle em instalaes fixas ATENO ANTES DE UTILIZAR O RDIO PROCURE LER ESTE FOLHETO, QUE CONTM IMPORTANTES INSTRUES DE OPERAO PARA O USO SEGURO, BEM COMO INFORMAES SOBRE A ENERGIA DE RF E SEU CONTROLE, COM A FINALIDADE DE GARANTIR A CONFORMIDADE COM OS LIMITES DE EXPOSIO ENERGIA DE RADIOFREQNCIA ESTABELECIDOS NAS NORMAS NACIONAIS E INTERNACIONAIS APLICVEIS. As informaes contidas neste documento substituem as informaes a respeito de segurana geral contidas nos manuais do usurio publicados antes de fevereiro de 2002. Motorola, Inc. 2005 8000 W. Sunrise Blvd., Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33322, EUA

*6881095C99*

68P81095C99-E Portugus Informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e seu controle, e instrues operacionais para satisfazer os requisitos da ANATEL sobre o uso como ferramenta ocupacional AVISO: Este rdio foi projetado para ser usado em ambientes ocupacionais controlados, onde os usurios estejam plenamente conscientes da exposio energia de radiofreqncia a que esto sujeitos e podem exercer o controle sobre tal exposio de modo a satisfazer as exigncias de limites de exposio estabelecidos pela ANATEL. Esta unidade de rdio NO se destina a venda ao pblico em geral no mercado de consumo de massa, nem se destina ao uso em ambientes diferentes daqueles aqui descritos. Este rdio bidirecional utiliza energia eletromagntica no espectro de radiofreqncia (RF) para permitir a comunicao distncia entre dois ou mais usurios. O rdio utiliza a energia de radiofreqncia ou ondas de rdio para enviar e receber chamadas. A energia de RF uma forma de energia eletromagntica. Este tipo de energia se apresenta sob outras formas, dentre as quais se incluem a luz solar e os raios X. A energia de RF, contudo, no deve ser confundida com estas outras formas de energia eletromagntica que, quando so usadas indevidamente, podem causar danos biolgicos. Nveis muito elevados de raios X, por exemplo, podem produzir danos aos tecidos e ao material gentico. Especialistas em cincias, engenharia, medicina, sade e indstria tm trabalhado conjuntamente com as diferentes organizaes com a finalidade de desenvolver normas que definem os limites prudentes de exposio energia de RF. Estas normas proporcionam os nveis recomendveis de exposio RF, tanto para os trabalhadores quanto para o pblico em geral. Estes nveis recomendados de exposio energia de RF incluem margens de segurana suficientemente amplas. Todos os rdios bidirecionais Motorola so projetados, fabricados e testados de maneira segura de modo a assegurar o cumprimento dos nveis de exposio RF estabelecidos pelos organismos pblicos reguladores. Alm disto, os fabricantes recomendam aos usurios de rdios bidirecionais que sigam as instrues de operao especficas. Estas instrues so importantes uma vez que informam aos usurios a respeito da exposio energia de RF e oferecem procedimentos simples para seu controle. Portugus 2 Visite os websites indicados a seguir para obter mais informaes sobre o que se trata a exposio energia de RF e de como controlar esta exposio de modo a garantir a observncia dos limites de exposio estabelecidos. http://www.anatel.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Regulamentos da Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos As normas da ANATEL estipulam que os fabricantes de rdios mveis bidirecionais no podero comercializar seus produtos nos Estados Unidos exceto se tais produtos cumprirem com as exigncias de limites de exposio energia de RF estabelecidos pela ANATEL. Quando a natureza do trabalho requer o uso de rdios bidirecionais, a ANATEL exige que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes dos efeitos da exposio e que sejam capazes de controlar o nvel de exposio a que esto submetidos de modo a satisfazer as exigncias do trabalho. As informaes sobre exposio podem ser facilitadas por meio do uso de uma etiqueta que remeta os usurios fonte de informaes apropriadas. Seu rdio bidirecional Motorola contm uma etiqueta com informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF. Alm disto, no manual do usurio do produto Motorola, ou em um folheto de segurana publicado em separado, esto includas as informaes e instrues de operao necessrias para controlar a exposio energia de RF e para garantir o cumprimento das normas. Conformidade com a normativa sobre a exposio RF Este rdio bidirecional Motorola foi projetado e testado com a finalidade de garantir a sua compatibilidade com as normas e recomendaes nacionais e internacionais descritas a seguir no que se refere a exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofreqncia. Este rdio atende aos limites de exposio estabelecidos pelo IEEE e pela ICNIRP para ambientes ocupacionais ou com controle de exposio energia de radiofreqncia, em ciclos de trabalho de at 50% (50% transmisso/50% recepo) e foi aprovado pela ANATEL para uso como ferramenta ocupacional. No que se refere medio da energia de RF para a determinao de conformidade com as diretrizes de exposio da ANATEL, a antena do rdio irradia energia de RF mensurvel somente quando est transmitindo (quando o usurio est falando) e no quando est recebendo (quando o usurio est ouvindo) ou quando se encontra em espera. 3 Portugus Este rdio bidirecional Motorola satisfaz s seguintes normas e recomendaes relacionadas exposio energia de radiofreqncia:

Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos (ANATEL), Cdigo de Regulamentos Federais; 47 CFR, Parte 2, Subparte J Instituto Nacional Americano de Normas (ANSI) / Instituto de Engenheiros Eltricos e Eletrnicos (IEEE) C95. 1-1992 Instituto de Engenheiros Eltricos e Eletrnicos (IEEE) (C95.1 - Edio 1999).

Comisso Internacional para Proteo contra Radiao no Ionizante (ICNIRP) 1998.

Ministrio da Sade (Canad), Cdigo de segurana 6. Limites da exposio humana aos campos eletromagnticos de radiofreqncia situados no intervalo de freqncias de 3 kHz a 300 GHz (1999).

Autoridade Australiana de Comunicaes, Normativa de Radiocomunicaes de 2003 (exposio humana radiao eletromagntica).

ANATEL, Agncia Reguladora do Brasil, Resoluo 256 (11 de abril de 2001) requisitos adicionais para a certificao de produtos SMR, celulares e PCS. Orientaes gerais de conformidade e controle da exposio de RF e instrues de operao Para controlar a exposio a que tanto o usurio como outras pessoas se submetem, e para assegurar o cumprimento dos limites de exposio RF, deve-se observar sempre os procedimentos descritos a seguir. Orientaes gerais:

O equipamento deve estar acompanhado das informaes relacionadas com a energia de RF quando o mesmo for transferido a outros usurios.

No utilize este dispositivo sem antes satisfazer os requisitos operacionais aqui descritos. Instrues:

No transmita mais de 50% do tempo, de modo a no ultrapassar o mximo ciclo de trabalho especificado de 50%. Para transmitir (falar) pressione o boto de transmisso (PTT); se o rdio estiver equipado com VOX, fale junto ao microfone. O LED vermelho acende quando o rdio est transmitindo. Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT. Se o rdio estiver equipado com VOX, pare de falar. O LED vermelho se apaga quando o rdio encerra a transmisso. importante no transmitir mais de 50% do tempo, uma vez que o rdio emite energia de RF mensurvel somente quando est em transmisso (em termos da conformidade com as normas de medio). Portugus 4

Transmita somente quando as pessoas de fora do veculo se encontrarem afastadas pelo menos distncia lateral mnima recomendada (conforme mostrado na tabela 1) da carroceria de um veculo equipado com antena devidamente instalada. Esta separao assegura que haja distncia suficiente entre uma antena exterior devidamente instalada (conforme as instrues de instalao) para satisfazer os requisitos de exposio energia de RF estipulados nas normas acima mencionadas. NOTA: A tabela 1 mostrada a seguir indica a distncia lateral recomendada, em um ambiente no controlado, que deve ser mantida pelos transeuntes em relao carroceria de um veculo equipado com uma antena transmissora aprovada e devidamente instalada (isto , monopolos sobre um plano de terra, ou bipolos) para diferentes nveis de potncia nominal de rdios mveis instalados em um veculo. Tabela 1. Potncia nominal do rdio bidirecional mvel instalado em um veculo e distncia lateral mnima recomendada da carroceria do veculo Potncia nominal do rdio mvel (ver nota) Distncia lateral mnima da carroceria do veculo Menos de 7 watts 20 centmetros (8 polegadas) 7 a 15 watts 16 a 39 watts 40 a 110 watts 30 centmetros (1 p) 60 centmetros (2 ps) 90 centmetros (3 ps)

Quando um rdio mvel utilizado juntamente com outro transmissor co-

localizado como, por exemplo, um repetidor veicular, o operador do veculo ser responsvel por tomar as medidas necessrias para manter os transeuntes distncia mnima exigida do veculo, de modo a garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio energia de RF estabelecidos pela FCC para a populao em geral. Para obter mais detalhes, consulte o manual do usurio dos transmissores co-localizados. 5 Portugus NOTA: Se no tiver certeza sobre o valor da potncia nominal de seu rdio, entre em contato com o representante ou a concessionria Motorola e informe o nmero de modelo do rdio que aparece na etiqueta do rdio. Se no for possvel determinar a potncia de sada nominal, assegure-se de manter a separao de 1 metro (3 ps) da carroceria do veculo. Orientaes gerais para a instalao das antenas de rdios mveis

As orientaes gerais descritas a seguir para a instalao de antenas de rdios mveis se aplicam somente a veculos automotores com carroceria metlica ou a veculos com planos de terra apropriados.

As antenas devem ser instaladas na rea central do teto ou da tampa do porta-

malas, levando em considerao as condies de exposio aplicveis aos passageiros do banco traseiro, bem como as instrues e restries especficas mencionadas no manual de instalao do rdio e os requisitos estabelecidos pelo fornecedor da antena.

A instalao na tampa do porta-malas limitada a veculos cujas tampas do compartimento de porta-malas sejam planas e claramente definidas e, em alguns casos, a modelos especficos de rdios e antenas. Consulte no manual de instalao do rdio as informaes especficas sobre a localizao e a forma de instalar os diferentes tipos de antenas aprovados para satisfazer deste modo as exigncias de operao recomendadas e assim proteger as pessoas que possam estar expostas.

Use somente a antena Motorola fornecida ou uma antena de reposio aprovada pela Motorola. O uso de antenas, modificaes ou acessrios no aprovados poder resultar em dano ao rdio e se constituir em uma violao das normas de segurana em relao energia de RF. Acessrios aprovados

Este rdio foi testado e constatou-se que satisfaz as normas de segurana em relao energia de RF sempre que utilizado com os acessrios Motorola fornecidos ou destinados a este produto. O uso de outros acessrios pode se constituir em uma violao das normas de segurana em relao energia de RF.

Para obter a lista de antenas aprovadas pela Motorola, visite o website indicado a seguir, o qual contm uma lista de acessrios aprovados para seu modelo de rdio:

http://www.motorola.com/cgiss/index.shtml. Portugus 6 Informaes adicionais Para obter informaes adicionais sobre os requisitos de exposio ou sobre treinamento, visite o seguinte website: http://www.motorola.com/rfhealth. Orientaes gerais de controle e conformidade e instrues de operao de rdios mveis bidirecionais instalados como estaes de controle em locais fixos Se um equipamento de rdio mvel for instalado em um local fixo e o mesmo for colocado em funcionamento como uma estao de controle ou como uma unidade fixa, a instalao da antena dever satisfazer os requisitos descritos a seguir, de modo a garantir um rendimento otimizado e para atender aos limites de exposio energia de radiofreqncia estabelecidos nas normas e orientaes mencionadas na pgina 4:

Sempre que for possvel, a antena dever ser instalada fora do edifcio em um teto ou torre.

Como acontece em todas as instalaes de antenas feitas em locais fixos, responsabilidade do licenciado manter o local em conformidade com os regulamentos aplicveis. Tambm possvel que existam requisitos adicionais tais como medies de propagao, colocao de sinalizao de aviso e outras restries de acesso ao local.

Para obter informaes adicionais sobre a instalao, consulte as orientaes relativas s distncias mnimas de separao mencionadas anteriormente na seo denominada Orientaes de conformidade e controle da exposio de RF e instrues de operao, constantes nesse documento. Interferncia e compatibilidade eletromagntica NOTA: Quase todos os dispositivos eletrnicos so susceptveis interferncia eletromagntica se no estiverem devidamente blindados ou se no tiverem sido projetados ou configurados de maneira a serem compatveis com estes tipos de sinais eletromagnticos. possvel que seja necessrio realizar testes de compatibilidade para se determinar se algum dos equipamentos eletrnicos usados nos veculos, prximo a eles ou prximo s instalaes de antenas feitas em locais fixos sensvel energia de radiofreqncia externa, ou se h necessidade de executar algum procedimento para eliminar ou reduzir a possibilidade de interao entre o rdio transmissor e o referido equipamento ou dispositivo. 7 Portugus Edificaes Para evitar problemas de interferncia e/ou compatibilidade eletromagntica, desligue o rdio em todos os locais onde houver avisos instruindo neste sentido. Por exemplo, em hospitais e estabelecimentos de assistncia mdica podem estar sendo utilizados equipamentos sensveis energia de RF externa. Veculos Para evitar uma possvel interao entre o rdio transmissor e qualquer um dos mdulos de controle eletrnico do veculo (por exemplo, o controle do sistema anti-

bloqueio de freios (ABS), o controle do motor ou o controle da transmisso), recomenda-se que se contrate um instalador experiente para realizar a instalao do rdio, bem como tomar as seguintes precaues:

1. Consulte as instrues fornecidas pelo fabricante e as demais documentaes tcnicas que contenham recomendaes para a instalao do rdio. 2. Antes de instalar o rdio, determine o local dos mdulos de controle eletrnico e do cabeamento no veculo. 3. Passe toda a fiao do rdio, incluindo a linha de transmisso da antena, o mais distante possvel das unidades de controle eletrnico e do cabeamento correspondente. Segurana ao dirigir Consulte as leis e regulamentos de trnsito referentes ao uso de rdios nos locais em que estiver dirigindo. Obedea sempre estas leis. Quando estiver utilizando o rdio ao dirigir:

Preste ateno ao volante quando estiver dirigindo.

Saia da pista e estacione antes de fazer ou receber uma chamada, se as condies de trnsito assim o exigirem. Portugus 8

ADVERTNCIA W A R N I N G Advertncias operacionais Veculos com air bag No instale nem coloque um rdio mvel sobre um air bag nem na rea prxima expanso do mesmo. O air bag se expande com grande intensidade. Se houver um rdio porttil na rea de expanso do air bag quando da expanso do mesmo, o rdio poder ser lanado com grande velocidade e causar leses graves aos passageiros. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em reas com atmosferas potencialmente inflamveis. As fascas lanadas em ambientes potencialmente explosivas podem causar uma exploso ou incndio e resultar em leses graves ou inclusive fatais. Entre os ambientes potencialmente explosivos esto as reas com combustveis situadas, por exemplo, na parte inferior de embarcaes, instalaes de transferncia e armazenamento de combustveis ou de produtos qumicos, e reas onde o ar possa conter produtos qumicos ou partculas tais como cereais, poeira comum ou poeira metlica. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos geralmente contm avisos de advertncia, embora nem sempre seja assim. 9 Portugus

ADVERTNCIA W A R N I N G reas de detonao e exploso Para evitar uma possvel interferncia com as operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo de detonadores eltricos, em reas de detonao ou onde houver avisos indicando para desligar os rdios bidirecionais. Siga todos os avisos e instrues. No caso de rdios instalados em veculos movidos a gs liqefeito de petrleo, consulte a norma NFPA 58 da Associao Nacional de Proteo contra Incndios dos EUA (National Fire Protection Association) para obter informaes a respeito do armazenamento, manuseio e/ou recipientes. Para obter uma cpia da norma NFPA 58 entre em contato com a Associao Nacional de Proteo contra Incndios, One Battery Park, Quincy, MA, EUA. Portugus 10 Brochure de normes de scurit et dexposition lnergie de RF pour radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes dans des vhicules ou comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes ATTENTION AVANT DUTILISER CETTE RADIO, LISEZ CETTE BROCHURE QUI CONTIENT DIMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS SUR LE MODE DEMPLOI SCURITAIRE DU PRODUIT AINSI QUE DES INFORMATIONS RELATIVES LNERGIE DE RF ET SON CONTRLE, AFIN DASSURER LA CONFORMIT AUX LIMITES DEXPOSITION LNERGIE DE RADIOFRQUENCE TABLIES PAR LES NORMES NATIONALES ET INTERNATIONALES APPLICABLES. Les informations contenues dans ce document remplacent les informations gnrales de scurit des manuels de lutilisateur publis avant fvrier 2002. Motorola, Inc. 2005 8000 W. Sunrise Blvd., Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33322, tats-Unis.

*6881095C99*

68P81095C99-E Franais Sensibilisation lexposition lnergie de RF, moyens de contrle et consignes dutilisation pour conformit aux normes du FCC en matire dusage professionnel de cette radio AVIS :

Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de lexposition lnergie de RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par le FCC. Ce dispositif radio Nest PAS autoris pour lensemble de la population, les consommateurs en gnral, ni pour une utilisation autre que celle dcrite ici. Cette radio bidirectionnelle utilise de lnergie lectromagntique dans le spectre des radiofrquences (RF) pour permettre les communications distance entre deux utilisateurs ou plus. Elle utilise lnergie de radiofrquence ou les ondes radio pour mettre et recevoir des appels. Lnergie de RF est une forme dnergie lectromagntique. Ce type dnergie se prsente sous dautres formes, notamment la lumire solaire et les rayons X. Il ne faut cependant pas confondre lnergie de RF avec dautres formes dnergie lectromagntique qui, lorsquelles sont mal utilises, peuvent occasionner des dommages biologiques. Des niveaux trs levs de rayons X, par exemple, peuvent endommager les tissus et le matriel gntique. Les experts en science, en ingnierie, en mdecine, en sciences de la sant et lindustrie travaillent en collaboration avec diffrentes organisations afin dlaborer des normes dfinissant les limites acceptables dexposition lnergie de RF. Ces normes fournissent les niveaux recommands dexposition aux RF, tant pour les travailleurs que pour le public en gnral. Ces niveaux recommands dexposition aux RF comprennent des marges de scurit apprciables. Toutes les radios bidirectionnelles Motorola sont conues, fabriques et testes de manire garantir leur conformit aux niveaux dexposition aux RF tablis par les autorits publiques comptentes. Par ailleurs, les fabricants recommandent aux utilisateurs de radios bidirectionnelles de suivre des directives de fonctionnement spcifiques. Ces directives sont importantes puisquelles informent les utilisateurs sur lexposition lnergie de RF et proposent des moyens simples pour la contrler. Franais 2 Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce quest lnergie de RF et sur les mesures de contrles observer afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire dexposition aux RF. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Rglements du Conseil fdral amricain des communications (FCC) Les rglements du FCC stipulent que les fabricants de radios mobiles bidirectionnelles ne peuvent commercialiser leurs produits aux tats-Unis quaprs avoir vrifi leur conformit aux limites dexposition lnergie de RF tablies par le FCC. Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, le FCC exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de lexposition et quils soient capables de contrler le niveau dexposition auquel ils se soumettent, afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Vous pouvez contribuer la sensibilisation lexposition aux RF en apposant des tiquettes renvoyant les utilisateurs vers la source dinformation approprie. Votre radio bidirectionnelle Motorola comporte une tiquette de produit sur lexposition lnergie de RF. Dautre part, vous trouverez dans le manuel de lutilisateur du produit Motorola ou dans la brochure de scurit fournie sparment, les informations requises et le mode demploi permettant de contrler lexposition lnergie de RF et de garantir le respect des normes. Conformit aux normes sur lexposition aux RF Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola a t conue et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes et recommandations nationales et internationales ci-dessous lies lexposition des tres humains lnergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Cette radio respecte les limites dexposition tablies par l'IEEE et la ICNIRP pour les environnements professionnels ou avec contrle dexposition lnergie de radiofrquence, des cycles de travail allant jusqu 50 % (50 %

transmission/50 % rception) et est approuv par le FCC pour un usage professionnel. En ce qui concerne la mesure de lnergie de RF afin dvaluer la conformit aux normes dexposition du FCC, la radio met de lnergie de RF mesurable seulement lorsquelle est en cours de transmission (conversation), et non pas lorsquelle reoit (coute) ni quand elle est en mode Attente. 3 Franais Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola est conforme aux normes et aux lignes directrices suivantes relatives lexposition lnergie de RF :

Conseil fdral amricain des communications (FCC), Code de la rglementation fdrale ; 47CFR partie 2 sous-section J

Organisme de normalisation amricain (ANSI) / Linstitut des ingnieurs lectriciens et lectroniciens (IEEE) C95. 1-1992

Linstitut des ingnieurs lectriciens et lectroniciens (IEEE) (C95.1-dition 1999).

Comit international pour la protection contre les radiations non ionisantes

(ICNIRP) 1998.

Ministre de la sant (Canada), Code de scurit 6. Limites dexposition humaine aux champs lectromagntiques de radiofrquence dans la gamme de frquence allant de 3 kHz 300 GHz (1999).

Direction australienne des communications, Norme de radiocommunications 2003

(exposition humaine au rayonnement lectromagntique).

ANATEL, Entit de rgulation du Brsil, Rsolution 256 (11 avril 2001) exigences supplmentaires pour la certification des produits RMS, cellulaires et PCS . Directives en matire de conformit et de contrle dexposition aux RF et consignes de fonctionnement Pour contrler lexposition laquelle vous-mme et dautres personnes se soumettent et garantir le respect des limites dexposition aux RF, observez toujours les consignes suivantes. Consignes :

Lorsque lappareil est cd dautres utilisateurs, il doit tre accompagn des informations de sensibilisation des utilisateurs.

Nutilisez pas cet appareil si les conditions de fonctionnement dcrites ici ne sont pas runies. Consignes :

Nmettez pas plus de 50% du temps afin de ne pas dpasser le cycle maximal de travail spcifi de 50 %. Pour mettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton de transmission (PTT) ou, si la radio est quipe de VOX, parlez dans le microphone. La DEL rouge sallume lorsque la radio met. Pour recevoir des appels, relchez le bouton PTT, ou, si la radio est quipe de VOX, arrtez de parler. La DEL rouge steint lorsque la radio arrte dmettre. Il est important de ne pas mettre plus de 50% du temps tant donn que cette radio gnre une nergie de RF dont Franais 4 lexposition nest mesurable que lors de lmission (en termes de conformit aux normes de mesure).

Lmission ne doit se faire que lorsque les personnes situes lextrieur du vhicule se trouvent la distance latrale minimale recommande (indique dans le tableau 1) de la carrosserie dun vhicule quip dune antenne convenablement installe. Cette sparation garantit une distance suffisante par rapport une antenne extrieure convenablement installe (conformment aux consignes dinstallation) pour rpondre aux exigences en matire dexposition lnergie de RF stipules dans les normes mentionnes plus haut. REMARQUE : Le tableau 1 ci-dessous indique la distance latrale minimum recommande, dans un environnement non contrl, pour les passants par rapport la carrosserie dun vhicule quip dune antenne mettrice agre et convenablement installe (cest--dire, antenne unipolaire plan de sol, ou doublet) pour diffrents niveaux de puissance nominale de radios mobiles installes dans un vhicule. Tableau 1. Puissance nominale de la radio bidirectionnelle mobile installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande de la carrosserie du vhicule Puissance nominale de la radio mobile

(voir Remarque) Distance latrale minimale de la carrosserie du vhicule Moins de 7 watts 20 centimtres (8 pouces) 7 15 watts 16 39 watts 40 110 watts 30 centimtres (1 pied) 60 centimtres (2 pieds) 90 centimtres (3 pieds)

Lorsqu'une radio mobile est utilise av ec un autre metteur ayant la mme position, par exemple un rpteur vhiculaire, il incombe l'oprateur du vhicule de prendre les mesures ncessaires pour maintenir les tiers la distance requise du vhicule de faon garantir la conformit aux limites d'exposition l'nergie de RF tablies par la FCC pour le public en gnral. Pour plus de renseignements, consultez le guide de l'utilisateur relatif aux metteurs ayant la mme position. 5 Franais REMARQUE : Si vous ntes pas sr de la puissance nominale de votre radio, contactez le reprsentant ou le concessionnaire Motorola et indiquez-lui le numro de modle de la radio qui figure sur ltiquette de celle-ci. Si vous narrivez pas dterminer la puissance de sortie nominale, conservez une distance dun mtre (3 pieds) par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule. La puissance maximale indique sur l'autorisation du FCC peut tre suprieure la puissance nominale si l'on prend en compte les variations de production. Consignes dinstallation pour les antennes de radios mobiles

Les consignes suivantes pour linstallation dantennes de radios mobiles sont applicables uniquement aux vhicules automobiles carrosserie mtallique ou aux vhicules plans de sol appropris.

Les antennes doivent tre installes au centre du toit ou du capot du coffre, en tenant compte des conditions dexposition des passagers du sige arrire, ainsi que des consignes et restrictions spcifiques mentionnes dans le manuel dinstallation de la radio et des exigences tablies par le fournisseur de lantenne.

Les installations sur le capot du coffre sont rserves aux vhicules quips de coffres surfaces planes clairement dfinies et dans la plupart des cas, des modles spcifiques de radios et dantennes. Consultez dans le manuel dinstallation de la radio les informations spcifiques relatives lemplacement et au mode dinstallation des diffrents types dantennes agrs, destines fournir toute personne risquant dtre expose les distances de fonctionnement recommandes.

Utilisez uniquement lantenne agre fournie par Motorola ou une antenne de rechange agre Motorola. Lutilisation dantennes, de modifications ou daccessoires non agrs peut endommager la radio et constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF. Accessoires agrs

Cette radio a t teste et dclare conforme aux normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF lorsquelle est utilise avec les accessoires Motorola fournis ou dsigns pour ce produit. Lutilisation dautres accessoires peut constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF.

Pour obtenir une liste dantennes agres Motorola, visitez le site Web suivant qui rpertorie les accessoires agrs pour ce modle de radio :

http://www.motorola.com/cgiss/index.shtml. Franais 6 Informations complmentaires Pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur les exigences en matire dexposition ou des informations de formation, visitez le site http://www.motorola.com/rfhealth. Directives de contrle et de conformit et consignes de fonctionnement des radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes. Si un appareil de radio mobile est install dans un endroit fixe et quil est utilis comme station de contrle ou comme unit fixe, linstallation de lantenne doit rpondre aux exigences ci-dessous afin de garantir un rendement optimal et de respecter les limites dexposition lnergie de RF tablies dans les normes et directives numres page 4 :

Dans la mesure du possible, lantenne doit tre monte sur le toit ou sur une tour, lextrieur du btiment.

Comme pour toutes les installations dantennes emplacements fixes, il incombe au grant de maintenir lemplacement en conformit avec les rglements en vigueur. Par ailleurs, dautres exigences peuvent sappliquer, telles que des mesures de propagation, la pose de panneaux et des restrictions de laccs lemplacement afin dtre certain que les limites dexposition mentionnes ne sont pas dpasses.

Pour toute information d'installation supplmentaire, consultez les directives relatives aux distances de sparation minimum fournies ci-dessus dans la section de ce document intitule Directives en matire de conformit et de contrle d'exposition aux RF et consignes de fonctionnement. Interfrence et compatibilit lectromagntique REMARQUE : La grande majorit des dispositifs lectroniques sont sensibles leffet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) sils ne sont pas convenablement protgs ou sils ne sont pas conus ou configurs de telle sorte quils soient compatibles avec ce type de signaux lectromagntiques. Il se peut que des tests de compatibilit soient ncessaires afin de dterminer si lun des appareils lectroniques utiliss lintrieur ou proximit des vhicules ou proximit dantennes emplacements fixes est sensible lnergie de RF externe ou sil faut prendre des mesures quelconques pour liminer ou attnuer le risque dinteraction entre la radio mettrice et lappareil ou le dispositif. 7 Franais Btiments Afin dviter des problmes dinterfrence et/ou de compatibilit lectromagntique, teignez la radio dans tous les tablissements o des panneaux daffichage vous invitent le faire. Il se peut, par exemple, que les hpitaux ou les tablissements de sant utilisent des appareils sensibles lnergie de RF externe. Vhicules Afin dviter une ventuelle interaction entre la radio mettrice et lun des modules de contrle lectronique du vhicule (par exemple, le contrle du systme de freinage antiblocage (ABS), le contrle du moteur ou le contrle de la transmission) il est recommand de faire appel uniquement un installateur qualifi pour raliser linstallation de la radio et de prendre les prcautions suivantes :

1. Consultez la notice du fabricant ou toute autre documentation technique contenant des recommandations pour linstallation de la radio. 2. Avant dinstaller la radio, dterminez lemplacement des modules de contrle lectronique et du cblage lintrieur du vhicule. 3. Faites passer tout le cblage de la radio, y compris la ligne de transmission de lantenne, le plus loin possible des units de contrle lectronique et du cblage correspondant. Scurit lors de la conduite Consultez la lgislation et les rglements en vigueur sur lutilisation des radios dans les zones o vous conduisez. Respectez toujours ces rgles. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio en conduisant :

Concentrez-vous entirement sur votre conduite et sur la route.

Rangez-vous sur le bas-ct et stationnez votre vhicule avant de faire ou de rpondre un appel, si les conditions de conduite lexigent. Franais 8 Avertissements de fonctionnement

AVERTISSEMENT W A R N I N G Vhicules quips de sac gonflable vitez de monter ou de placer une radio mobile au-dessus dun sac gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Les sacs gonflables se dploient avec une force considrable. Si une radio se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du sac lorsque celui-

ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors doccasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers. Atmosphres potentiellement explosives teignez la radio avant de pntrer dans une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. La moindre tincelle dans ce type d'atmosphre peut provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles ou mme la mort. Parmi les zones potentiellement explosives, citons les zones davitaillement en carburant, par exemple la cale des bateaux, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques et les zones dans lesquelles lair est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou de la poudre mtallique. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce nest pas toujours le cas. 9 Franais

AVERTISSEMENT W A R N I N G Dtonateurs et zones de dynamitage Afin dviter toute interfrence ventuelle avec les oprations de dtonation, teignez la radio proximit de dtonateurs lectriques, dans une zone de dtonations ou l o sont affichs des panneaux vous invitant teindre les radios bidirectionnelles. Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. En ce qui concerne les radios installes dans des vhicules fonctionnant au GPL, consultez la norme NFPA 58 de lAssociation amricaine pour la protection contre lincendie (National Fire Protection Association) pour obtenir des informations sur le stockage, la manipulation et/ou les conteneurs. Pour obtenir une copie de la norme GPL, NFPA 58, contactez lAssociation amricaine pour la protection contre lincendie (National Fire Protection Association), One Battery Park, Quincy, MA. Franais 10

 

 

m APX 7500 O5 Control Head Mobile Radio User Guide Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc. Address: Motorola, Inc. 1301 E. Algonquin Rd.Schaumburg, IL60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: APX 7500 conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. D e c l a r a t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y i English Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. y t i m r o f n o C f o n o i t a r a l c e D ii English Contents This User Guide contains all the information you need to use the APX 7500 Series Digital Mobile Radios. Declaration of Conformity . i Important Safety Information . viii Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance . viii Software Version . viii Computer Software Copyrights . ix Documentation Copyrights . ix Disclaimer . ix Getting Started . 1 How to Use This User Guide . 1 Notations Used in This Manual . 1 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You . 2 C o n t e n t s Preparing Your Radio for Use . 3 Turning On the Radio . 3 Adjusting the Volume . 3 Identifying Radio Controls . 4 Radio Parts and Controls . 4 O5 Control Head . 4 Programmable Features . 5 Assignable Radio Functions . 5 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . 6 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions . 7 Use the Menu Select Button (g). . 7 Using the Menu Select Buttons . 7 Using the Advance Programmable Buttons . 8 Using the Navigation Buttons . 8 Home Button . 8 Data Feature Button . 9 4-Way Navigation Button . 9 Volume Knob . 9 Channel Knob . 9 Using the Keypad . 10 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode . 10 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode . 11 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode . 12 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode . 13 iii English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . 14 Identifying Status Indicators . 14 Status Icons . 15 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . 17 Status Icons . 17 TMS Menu Options . 18 LED Indicators . 18 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . 19 Alert Tones . 20 Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts . 23 General Radio Operation . 24 Selecting a Zone . 24 Selecting a Radio Channel . 25 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call . 26 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call . 26 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

(Trunking, Digital Mode Only) . 26 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) . 27 Making a Radio Call . 27 Making a Talkgroup Call . 28 s t n e t n o C iv English Making a Private Call (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) . 28 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) . 29 Repeater or Direct Operation . 30 Monitoring Features . 30 Monitoring a Channel . 30 Conventional Mode Operation . 31 Advanced Features . 32 Advanced Call Features . 32 Calling a Phone Not in the List . 32 Receiving and Making a Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) . 33 Receiving a Selective Call . 33 Making a Selective Call . 33 Using the Talkgroup Call Feature

(Conventional Operation Only) . 34 Selecting a Talkgroup . 34 Sending a Status Call . 35 Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature

(Trunking, Digital Mode Only) . 35 Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) . 36 Classifying Regrouped Radios . 36 Multiple Control Head Features . 37 Multiple Control Head Features . 37 Setting the Initial Control Heads ID . 37 All Active Mode . 38 Intercom Feature . 38 One Active Mode . 38 Intercom Features . 39 Contacts . 40 Making a Private Call from Contacts . 40 Adding a New Contact Entry . 41 Deleting a Contact Entry . 42 Adding a Contact to a Call List or Phone List . 43 Editing a Contact in a Call List or a Phone List . 43 Editing an Entry Alias . 43 Editing as Entry ID . 44 Editing a Call Type . 44 Scan Lists . 45 Viewing a Scan List . 45 Editing the Scan List . 45 Changing the Scan List Status . 46 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status . 46 Scan . 47 Turning Scan On or Off . 47 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only) . 47 Transmitting While the Scan is On . 47 Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan . 47 Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan . 48 Deleting a Nuisance Channel . 48 Restoring a Nuisance Channel . 48 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On . 49 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List . 49 Hang Up (HUB) . 49 Call Alert Paging . 50 Answering a Call Alert . 50 Sending a Call Alert Page . 50 In-Call User Alert . 51 Emergency Operation . 52 Sending an Emergency Alarm . 52 Sending an Emergency Call . 52 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call . 53 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm . 53 Special Considerations for Emergencies . 54 Automatic Registration Service (ARS) . 54 Selecting or Changing ARS Mode . 54 Accessing the User Login Feature . 55 Logging In as a User . 55 Logging Out . 56 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . 57 Accessing TMS Feature . 57 Composing and Sending a New Text Message . 58 C o n t e n t s v English Sending a Quick Text Message . 59 Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features . 61 Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message . 61 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message . 61 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message . 62 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message . 62 Managing Text Messages . 63 Receiving a Text Message . 63 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox . 63 Replying to a Received Text Message . 64 Accessing the Drafts Folder . 65 Managing Sent Text Messages . 66 Viewing a Sent Text Message . 66 Sending a Sent Text Message . 67 Deleting a Text Message . 67 Secure Operation . 68 Selecting Secure Transmissions . 68 Selecting Clear Transmissions . 68 Managing Encryption . 68 Loading an Encryption Key . 68 Using the Multikey Feature . 69 Selecting an Encryption Key . 69 s t n e t n o C vi English Selecting a Keyset . 70 Using the Key Zeroization Feature . 70 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) . 71 Global Positioning System (GPS) Enabled . 71 Understanding the GPS Feature . 71 Enhancing GPS Performance . 72 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature . 73 Saving a Waypoint . 74 Viewing a Saved Waypoint . 75 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint . 75 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint . 76 Deleting All Saved Waypoint . 77 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint . 77 Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode . 78 Trunking System Controls . 78 Using the Failsoft System . 78 Going Out-of-Range . 79 SmartZone . 79 Using Site Trunking Feature . 79 Locking and Unlocking a Site . 80 Viewing and Changing a Site . 80 Viewing the Current Site . 80 Changing the Current Site . 80 When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. . 80 Trunked Announcement . 80 Initiating an Announcement . 81 Utilities . 81 Viewing Recent Calls List . 81 Selecting the Power Level . 82 Selecting a Radio Profile . 82 Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias . 83 Controlling the Display Backlight . 83 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off . 83 Turning Voice Mute On or Off . 84 Using the Time-Out Timer . 84 Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features . 85 Digital Options . 85 Using the PL Defeat Feature . 86 Using the Digital PTT ID Feature . 86 Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) . 86 Accessing General Radio Information . 86 Accessing Radio Information . 87 Viewing IP Information . 87 Viewing Control Assignments . 88 Editing the Soft ID . 88 Optional External Alarms (Horn and Lights) . 89 Non-Permanent Horn and Lights . 89 Permanent Horn and Lights . 89 Changing the Selected Alarms . 90 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On . 90 Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms . 90 Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms . 90 C o n t e n t s Helpful Tips . 91 Accessories . 92 Antennas . 92 Audio . 93 Control Station . 93 Footswitches and PTTs . 94 Keypad . 94 Microphones . 95 Motorcycle . 95 Mounting Solution . 95 Power Cables . 96 Programming/Accessory Cables . 96 Siren . 97 vii English Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range . 98 Special Channel Assignments . 98 Emergency Channel . 98 Non-Commercial Call Channel . 99 Operating Frequency Requirements . 99 Glossary . 102 Commercial Warranty and Service . 105 Index . 109 s t n e t n o C viii English Important Safety Information Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance Before using this product, read the operating instructions for safe usage contained in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio.

+ = K J E  

!

ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to occupational use only to satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements. Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio (Motorola Publication part number 6881095C99) to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorola.com/governmentandenterprise Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the radio's software version R02.00.00 or later. Accessing Radio Information on page 87 to determine your radio's software version. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. I m p o r t a n t S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n viii English Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. s t h g i r y p o C e r a w t f o S r e t u p m o C ix English Getting Started Take a moment to review the following:

How to Use This User Guide. page 1 Notations Used in This Manual . page 1 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You. page 2 How to Use This User Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX 7500 Mobiles. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of WARNING, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed.

!

!

W A R N I N G

!

+ = K J E  

An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Note:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which is essential to emphasize. 1 English The following special notations identify certain items:

Example Home button or H PHONE

>

Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the radios display. This means Press the right side of the 4-way Navigation button. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio preprogrammed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 2 English Preparing Your Radio for Use Turning On the Radio . page 3 Adjusting the Volume. page 3 Turning On the Radio Press the Power On/Off Button briefly. You see red, yellow and green LEDs light up. The display then shows Zone and channel text, and menu items display on the screen. The backlight will turn on to the last selected dim level. Note:

Power On/

Off Button Pressing the Power Button before the LED lights up will be ignored. A CH MISMATCH error upon turning on your radio, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. The radio then performs a self check. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. To turn off the radio, press and hold the Power On/Off Button after the LEDs light up. Adjusting the Volume To increase the volume, rotate the Volume knob clockwise to increase the volume. To decrease the volume, rotate the Volume knob counterclockwise. Volume Knob P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i Note:

Note:

If FAIL ##/## appears in the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If ERROR ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, refer to the Troubleshootingsection. 3 English Identifying Radio Controls Take a moment to review the following:

Radio Parts and Controls . page 4 Programmable Features . page 5 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions . page 7 Using the Keypad . page 10 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . page 14 l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 4 English Radio Parts and Controls O5 Control Head

16 Volume Knob 15 Dim Button 14 Home Button 13 Power On/Off Button 12 Indicators 11 Channel Knob 10 Emergency*

9 Push-to-Talk

(PTT) Button 8 Side Button 1*

5 Navigation Button*

LED Indicators 4 Menu Entries 3 7 Side Button 2*

6 Side Button 3*

2 Menu Select Button*

1 Indicators Terminal for Microphone

*These radio controls/buttons are programmable. Data Feature Button Home Button

(Microphone) 17 18 Keypad Numbers 1, 2 and 3 *

19 22 21 20 Navigation Button

(Microphone) Cancel Button

() Okay/Select Button ()

*These radio controls/buttons are programmable. Programmable Features Any references in this manual to a control that is preprogrammed means that the control must be programmed by a dealer or a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software, in order to assign a feature to that control. The programmable buttons can be programmed as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press:

Press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Assignable Radio Functions

Call Alert Allows the radio to functions like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Call Response Allows you to answer a private call. Channel Selects a channel. Contacts Selects the Contacts menu. Dynamic Priority (Trunking Only) Allows any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Info Displays the information of the radio. IP Displays the IP (Internet Protocol) information of the radio. Monitor Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Nuisance Delete Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel, from the scan list. The designated transmit channel refers to the users selected zone/channel combination from which scan is initiated. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 5 English Phone Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. PL Defeat Overrides any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that is preprogrammed to a channel. Private Call Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Profiles Allows for easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Recent Calls Allows for easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Rekey Request Notifies the dispatcher that you want a new encryption keys. Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Scan List Programming Selects the scan list for editing. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Secure/Clear Toggles secure transmission on or off. Select Selects the assigned list for editing. Selective Call (Digital Modes Only) Calls an assigned radio. Site Lock/Unlock Locks onto a specific site. Site Search Performs site search for AMSS (Automatic Multiple Site Select) or SmartZone operation. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 6 English Status (Astro 25 Trunking Only) Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Ext PA On/Off Toggles the audio routing between the connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the radios internal public address (PA) system. PA On/Off Toggles the radios internal public address (PA) system on or off. TMS Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Login Automatically registers with the server. Zone Select Allows selection from a list of zones. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones on or off. Backlight Toggles display backlight on or off. Horns/Lights Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Keypad Mute Toggles the keypad tones on or off. Dim Changes the display brightness. Speaker Activates external speaker to share your call with your group. Squelch Toggles squelch level between normal and tight. TX Power Level Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Voice Mute Toggles voice mute on or off. Volume Set Adjusts the volume of the speakers. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following ways:

A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Using the Menu Select Buttons

The Menu Select buttons allow to access the menu entries of features. Note:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:

Press the Menu Select button (g) directly below CHAN. OR Menu Select Button Use the Menu Select Button (g). I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 7 English Using the Advance Programmable Buttons

There are two special features which are designed to help you to shorten the process on certain common features Emergency Button*

Menu Select Button*

Side Button 1 Side Button 2 Side Button 3 Keypad Numbers 1,2 and 3

* These programmable buttons support the One Touch Button feature. These programmable buttons support the Mode Select Button feature.

(Quick Access) One Touch Button Enters a menu with a short press on the preprogrammed One Touch button. Call, Page, Phone, Status and Message can be assigned to these buttons. Mode Select Button Programs the current zone and channel to a Mode Select button with a long press on the Mode Select button. After the buttons are programmed, you can return to the preprogrammed zone and channel with a short press on the programmed Mode Select button.

Using the Navigation Buttons Home Button

The H button returns you to the home (default) display. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the H button is also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. Note:

Some features do not require you to press H to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. The H button also can revert to home channel. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 8 English Data Feature Button

Use this button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. Volume Knob

Use this Volume Knob to adjust the volume of the speakers by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. 4-Way Navigation Button

Use this button to scroll through the radios lists or items in the display, or both. Channel Knob

Use this Channel Knob to scroll the channels by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 9 English Using the Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the keypad microphone (Motorola part number: HMN4079_) to access your radios features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The tables below show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.

Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode 14

/

15

+

16

\

17 18 19

(

20

) 21 l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 7 Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

*

13

$

9

-

5

!

4

?

11

#

12

&

3

, C F I L O R V Y 2 Key 1 1 1

. 2 A B 3 D E 4 G H 5 J K 6 M N 7 P Q 8 T U 9 W X 0 Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode.

* Space

# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. S 8 Z 10 English

Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode 14

/

7 Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

*

13

$

9

-

5

!

4

?

11

#

12

&

3

, c f i l o r v y 2

. b e h k n q u x Key 1 1 1 2 a 3 d 4 g 5 j 6 m 7 p 8 t 9 w 0 Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode.

* Space

# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. s z 15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

) I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 11 English 15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

)

Keypad Characters Numeric Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

*

12

&

13

$

11

#

9

-

7 14

/

3

, 2

. 5

!

4

?

Key 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0

* Space

# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 12 English

Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 8 10 12 13 11 9 14 5 6 7 4 C F 3 2 B E A D Key 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0

* Not applicable

# Not applicable 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 13 English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button PTT Button The PTT button on the side of the microphone serves two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Making a Radio Call on page 29. Identifying Status Indicators Your radio indicates its operational status through the following:

Status Icons . page 15 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . page 17 LED Indicators . page 18 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . page 19 Alert Tones. page 20 s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 14 English Status Icons u Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. t F V N Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Call Received Radio has received an Individual Call. Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the signal. Direct On = Radio is currently configured for direct radio to radio communication (during conventional operation only). Off = Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. M K Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored (during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On = The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is activated. Off = The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is deactivated. H or . i Power Level L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 15 English j Priority-One Channel Scan Blinking dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. View/Program Mode Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady = View mode Blinking = Program mode Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. k m s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 16 English AES Secure Operation On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. Location Signal On = Location feature is enabled, and location signal is available. Off = Location feature is disabled. Blinking = Location feature is enabled, but no location signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On = User is currently associated with the radio. Off = User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data Activity Data activity is present. l G n o Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 57 for more information. Status Icons

The following icons appear on the radios display for TMS features:

,

[

Z r Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read.

]

I P

;

p q Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. 2 Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 17 English 1 3

}

{

Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode.

TMS Menu Options Menu Option Description/Function BACK DEL EDIT EXIT NO OPTN RPLY Brings you back to the previous screen. Deletes a message or text. Brings you to the edit screen. Exits to the Home screen. Returns to the previous screen. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 18 English Menu Option SEL SEND YES Description/Function Selects the highlighted command. Sends the message. Updates or saves a command. LED Indicators LED indicators show the operational status of your radio. Solid red Radio is transmitting. Rapidly blinking red Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow Channel is busy. Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Blinking green Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporary changes the radios display backlight color and the alert text background color to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight Orange Event Emergency Alerts Red Critical Alerts Green Call Alerts When The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. The radio is out of range. The radio enters failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio receives private call. The radio receives phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives selective call. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 19 English Alert Tones An alert tone is a sound or group of sounds. Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of your radios conditions. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Tone Name When Two high-pitched tones Private Conversation When a Private Call is received. Four high-pitched tones When a Call Alert page is received. Call Alert every five seconds Single, high-pitched tone Central Acknowledge When a Call Alert, emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/message transmission is received by the systems central controller. Four high-pitched tones Mobile Unit Acknowledge When a Call Alert page is received by the intended unit, or the emergency System Busy alarm, reprogram request, or status/message transmission is acknowledged by the intended dispatcher. When the PTT button is pressed, indicates transmission fail because all system radio channels are in use. Release the PTT button and wait for call back. Automatic Call Back When a channel is now available for your previously requested transmission. Talk Permit (Optional) When the PTT button is pressed, indicates the system is accepting your transmission. Scan Alert On When Scan feature is activated through the preprogrammed button. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 20 English Sound similar to a telephone busy signal A series of two short, high-pitched tones A series of two short, high-pitched tones

(same as automatic call back) A series of low-pitched tones followed by a series of high-pitched tones You Hear A series of high-pitched tones followed by a series of low-pitched tones Tone Name Scan Alert Off When Scan feature is deactivated through the preprogrammed button. I When Continuous, low-pitched tone Talk-Prohibit Smart PTT Inhibit Out-of-Range Illegal Mode Single, high-pitched tone every nine seconds Failsoft

(When the PTT button is pressed) the system is out of service.

(When the PTT button is pressed) the channel is busy with the Smart PTT feature enabled.

(When the PTT button is pressed) indicates the radio is not in the range of the trunked radio system. When you have entered a mode where normal system traffic will be missed, or you are attempting something which is not permitted. Examples include: forgetting to exit the telephone interconnect mode after a call ends (fleet and subfleet calls cannot be received), attempting to transmit on a receive-only conventional mode, attempting to select a dynamic mode where no dynamic ID assignment has been made. When a trunked system central controller failure in an unmuted receive condition. The radio reverts from trunked operation to a system similar to conventional radio repeater operation. Other system users can be heard sharing the channel. Brief low-pitched tone Time-Out Timer Warning When your present transmission will soon be disabled. Single, short, high-

pitched tone Valid Key Single, low-pitched tone Invalid Key When you pressed a valid key, or you entered a feature configuration state, or you are receiving or transmitting in the clear mode on secure models (with TX Clear Alert Tones enabled). When you tried to make an invalid key press, or that an emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/message was not acknowledged. 21 English i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s You Hear Tone Name When Unique chirping sound Gurgle Unique low-pitched chirp Unique high-pitched chirp Dynamic Reprogramming When a dynamic ID is assigned. New Message When a new message is received. Priority Message When a priority message is received. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 22 English Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts The following appears on the radios display when you make and receive Phone calls. The radio also uses alert tones to indicate the current status. You Hear You See When Notes A Long Tone A Busy Tone NO PHONE You press the PTT button and the phone system is not available. Press H to hang up. The radio returns to the Home screen. PHONE BUSY The phone system is busy. Press H to exit the phone mode and try your call later. PHONE BUSY When a channel is not available. The radio automatically connects when a channel opens. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s NO ACKNOWLED GE A High-

Pitched Tone The call is not acknowledged. Press H to hang up. The radio returns to the Home screen. When you release the PTT button. The radio indicates to the landline party that he or she may begin talking. I i n d c a t o r s Note: You have the option of sending additional digits (overdial), such as an extension number, or credit card or PIN numbers, to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for live overdial, every digit entered after the call is connected is sent to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for buffered overdial, the digits pressed are entered into memory and then sent when the PTT button is pressed. Press the PTT button to send either digits or voice, but not both at the same time. 23 English General Radio Operation Once you understand how your APX 7500 O5 CH Mobile is configured, you are ready to use your radio. Use this navigation guide to familiarize yourself with the basic Call features:

Selecting a Zone . page 24 Selecting a Radio Channel . page 25 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call. page 26 Making a Radio Call . page 27 Repeater or Direct Operation . page 30 Monitoring Features . page 30 n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 3 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed 24 English Selecting a Zone A zone is a group of channels. Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use these features. Procedure:

Using the Menu Entry ZONE:

1 > to ZONE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ZONE. The display shows the current zone and channel. 3 > or < button until the desired zone is displayed. 4 Press H or the PTT button to confirm the selected zone number. 5 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone channel. OR Using the Menu Entry ZNUP or ZNDN 1 > to ZNUP or ZNDN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ZNUP or ZNDN until the required zone appears. zone channel. Note:

Positions of the ZNUP or ZNDN softkey on the display may differ each time you release the Menu Select button. Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/

receive frequency pairs. Use the following procedure to select a channel. Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. If you select a channel that is not within the preprogrammed band, the radio indicates that it is on an unsupported frequency with both audio and visual warnings. Consult a qualified radio technician for the right choice between the following methods. Procedure:

Rotate the Channel knob until the display shows the desired channel. OR Using the Menu Entry CHAN:

1 Press and hold > and hold to scroll to CHAN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN. The display shows the current zone and mode. 3 Rotate the Channel knob to the desired channel. 4 Press H or the PTT button to confirm the channel. 5 Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. OR Using the Menu Entry CNUP or CNDN 1 > to CNUP or CNDN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNUP or CNDN until the required zone appears. 3 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone channel. Note:

Positions of the CNUP or CNDN softkey on the display may differ each time you release the Menu Select button. When the channel you want is not shown in the current zone, the radio allows you to press < or >to the zone containing the channel. Please consult a qualified technician for this option. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 25 English Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:

When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen), depending on how your radio is preprogrammed:

1 ASTRO Conventional Only:

The LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:

The display shows the caller alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 28.

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

(Trunking, Digital Mode Only) A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. These one-to-one calls between two radios are not heard by others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

When you receive a Private Call:

1 You hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows CALL RECEIVED. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 3 During the call, the display shows the caller alias (name), if it is in the call list. OR During the call, the display shows the caller ID (number), if the callers name is not in the call list. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 26 English 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 5 Press H to hang up and return to the Home screen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the CALL, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See Making a Private Call (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) on page 28.

Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

1 You hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green. The display shows PHONE CALL and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press H or the Menu Select button directly below PHON button to hang up and return to the Home screen. See Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 29 for details. Making a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone switch The Channel Knob A preprogrammed One Touch button A preprogrammed Mode Select button The Contacts list (see Contacts on page 40). Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 27 English Making a Talkgroup Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:

1 < or > to TGRP. The display shows the last-selected talkgroup. OR Rotate the Channel Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. 4 ASTRO Conventional Only:

The LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:

The LED lights up solid red. 5 Speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. See Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) on page 34 for details on setting a Talkgroup n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 28 English

Making a Private Call (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert page if there is no answer from the target radio. Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Enhanced Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to CALL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. The LED lights up solid red. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the first number of the call list. OR

< or > to the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to start the Private Call. 5 A telephone-type ringing sounds if the receiving unit is in service. The display shows CALLING...<NUMBER> or CALLING...<ALIAS>. 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. OR If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. OR If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows NO ANSWER. 8 Press H to return to the Home screen. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 55 for more information. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)

This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to PHON. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. The display shows the last transmitted phone number. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the first number of the call list. OR

< or > to the required phone number. OR Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 4 Press and release the PTT button to dial the phone number. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press the PTT button to talk. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. 8 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. See Alert Tones on page 20 for more information if your call is NOT answered. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 29 English Repeater or Direct Operation Monitoring Features The REPEATER operation increases the radios range by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The DIRECT or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to DIR. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below DIR. 3 The Dir indicator lights to show REPEATER MODE if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. OR The Dir indicator lights to show DIRECT MODE and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode

(during conventional operation only). You can repeat step 2 to toggle between the two modes. Once in Direct Mode, press PTT button to start conversation with the radios nearby. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 30 English Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allowing only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Monitor a channel to ensure the channel is clear before transmitting. Monitoring a Channel

Procedure:

Lift the microphone control head off hook. Conventional Modes Only:

1 Listen for activity on that channel. 2 Adjust the Volume Knob if necessary. 3 If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start your conversation. OR Trunked Modes Only:

1 Press the PTT button. 2 If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if you hear no tone and the t indicator lights steadily, then proceed with your message. 3 Release the PTT button to receive (listen). if you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows OUT OF RANGE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below MON momentarily to activate monitoring. The display shows MONITOR ON. 3 Press the Menu Select button to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows MONITOR OFF. MONITOR ON shown on the display indicates that the radio is monitoring. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you dont hear all channel traffic. Conventional Mode Operation

This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus you can to listen to another user active on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from talking over someone elses conversation. Note:

This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Procedure:

Take the control head off hook. (This is the same as monitor on. You hear all channel traffic.) OR 1 At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, > or < button to MON. 31 English Advanced Call Features Calling a Phone Not in the List

1 < or > to PHON. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. 3 Enter the desired phone number from the optional keypad microphone. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press H or Menu Select button directly below PHON to exit. Advanced Features Use this navigation guide to learn more about advanced features available with your radio:

Advanced Call Features . page 32 Multiple Control Head Features . page 37 Contacts . page 40 Scan Lists . page 45 Scan . page 47 Call Alert Paging . page 50 Automatic Registration Service (ARS) . page 54 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . page 57 Secure Operation . page 68 Global Positioning System (GPS) Enabled. page 71 Utilities. page 81 s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 32 English

Receiving and Making a Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call

Procedure:

1 When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blinks and the display alternates between CALL RECEIVED and the home display. 2 Press the Menu Select button below CALL within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. The display shows the alias or ID number of the sender. 3 The speaker unmutes. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press H to return to the Home screen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the CALL, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 33. Making a Selective Call

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to CALL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the last number dialed. OR

< or > to the required ID. 33 English OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. If you do not press H button to hang up, your radio will remain in Selective Call state with the other unit. You will miss all subfleet traffic and incoming phone calls.

Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. Note:

Encryption keys are slaved to talkgroups. When talkgroups are enabled, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operation on page 68 for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Selecting a Talkgroup

Procedure:

1 < or > to TGRP. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TGRP. The display shows the last talkgroup that was selected and stored. 3 < or > to PSET for the preset preprogrammed talkgroup. OR

< or > to the required talkgroup. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the corresponding talkgroup in the list. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the currently selected talkgroup and return to the Home screen. 5 If the encryption key slaved to the new talkgroup is erased, a momentary key fail tone sounds and the display shows KEY FAIL. OR If the encryption key that is slaved to the new talkgroup is not allowed, a momentary key fail tone sounds and the display shows ILLEGAL KEY. 6 Press H or the PTT button to exit. 34 English Sending a Status Call

This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Status button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to STS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below STS. 3 The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 4 < or > to the required status. OR Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 5 Press the PTT button to send the status. The display shows PLEASE WAIT. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 When the dispatcher acknowledges, four tones sound and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. OR If no acknowledgment is received, a low-pitched tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press H or the PTT button.

Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. Note:

If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, an invalid tone sounds. 35 English 4 If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows ACK RECEIVED and the radio returns to the Home screen. OR If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, a low-pitched alert tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Try again or press H to cancel and return to the Home screen. Classifying Regrouped Radios

The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories: Select Enabled or Select Disabled. Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. Procedure:

1 When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. A gurgle tone sounds and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. 2 Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped.

Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) This feature lets you notify the dispatcher that you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to RPGM. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RPGM to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. 3 The display shows REPROGRAM RQST and PLEASE WAIT. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 36 English Multiple Control Head Features Multiple Control Head Features

This feature allows a transceiver to control as many as four O5 control heads. You can use the CAN cables to connect in any configuration that does not exceed 131 feet (40 meters) in combined length. O5 Control Head Installation Manual

(HLN6947) for further information. If a keypad microphone is connected after the radio has been turned on, the radio MAY fail to detect it.

!

+ = K J E  

The Multiple Control Head feature consists of 2 modes:

All Active mode One Active mode Multiple Control Head (MCH) feature can be programmed via Customer Programming Software (CPS). Note:

If two or more control heads are connected to the system before enabling the MCH feature in the CPS, the radio will display EXTRA CH or CH ID # ERR. Both errors are FATAL. Setting the Initial Control Heads ID

This feature allows you to setup the control head in the Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode. During the setup, the control head are defined as Control Head Number 1, Control Head Number 2, Control Head Number 3 and Control Head Number 4. Procedure:

1 Press the Power button to power off the radio. 2 Press and hold the left-most g button and the emergency button simultaneously. 3 While continuing to depress these two buttons, press the Power button to power on the radio and the control head. 4 The radio and the control head will power on into FPP mode. The display shows control heads ID number. 5 Turn the Channel knob to change the control heads ID number. 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 above to set the ID number for the rest of the attached control heads. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 37 English All Active Mode

The All Active mode enables all connected control heads of the radio to operate concurrently with each other. When you activate a feature on one control head, the rest of the control heads will have the same activated feature and indicator on their respective display. The multiple control head feature allows only control heads of the same type to be connected. Upon power up, if a control head of a different type is connected to the radio, the radio reports the fatal error CH MISMATCH on the display of all attached control heads. Intercom Feature

The All Active mode allows you to use one of the control head to talk to the user at the other control heads. Note: Only one intercom call can be initiated at one time. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below INTC to activate the intercom feature of any of the control head. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate an intercom transmission. All control heads that are attached will receive the same intercom call. 3 The display of the control heads receiving the intercom call shows the alias/ID number of the transmitting control head. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 38 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to deactivate the intercom feature. OR Press H to deactivate the intercom feature. OR Change to other mode to deactivate the intercom feature. OR Only in Emergency channel:

pressing the Emergency button or the emergency footswitch on any control head also deactivates the intercom feature. One Active Mode

The One Active mode enables only one control head to be visibly active at a time in a two control head system. In the One Active mode, if more than two (2) control heads are present upon power up, the radio shows a fatal error EXTRA CH on the display of all attached control heads. The active control head commands the system normally. In the meantime, the inactive control head is in remote mode with its display showing REMOTE. The Volume knob, DIM, Front/Rear (F/R) softkey and Emergency buttons remain active on the inactive head, while all other controls are disabled. Emergency footswitch and VIP inputs are also still active on the inactive control head. However, VIP inputs must be connected to the head assigned ID #1. Note: Only two (2) control heads are supported in the one active mode. Transceiver Z1 ZONE CHAN PWR SQL Active Radio REMOTE F/R Non-Active Radio Follow the procedure below to toggle between the two control heads. Procedure:

Press the Menu Select button directly below F/R. OR Press the Menu Select button preprogrammed user button on the keypad microphone. Intercom Features

The intercom feature allows a user at one control head to talk to the user at the other control heads of a Multiple Control Head configuration. At any given time, when a control head being operated has priority for the intercom call, all other control heads are blocked until the active control head releases PTT button. This can be made on any attached control head. This feature only applies to control heads in the All Active mode. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below INTC to activate the intercom feature. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 Press the PTT button on the microphone of one of the control heads to initiate the audio transmission. 3 All control heads that are attached, receive the same intercom call. The display of the receiving control heads shows the alias/ID number of the transmitting control head. Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to deactivate the intercom feature. OR Press H on any control head to deactivate the intercom feature. The intercom feature also deactivates when user initiates a mode change. If the radio is on an emergency channel, 39 English pressing of the EMERGENCY button or the emergency footswitch button on any control head also deactivates the intercom feature. Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contacts manages up to 2,500 contact entries, alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to 5 IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 40 English Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Note:

Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit.

Note:

Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Use the Options Menu. 1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to the call list. The display shows Contact Alias. 3 > or < to the required subscriber alias. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 5 > or < to CALL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 6 > or < to select the call type. 7 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 8 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 9 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid green. 10 If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. OR Use the PTT button:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. 3 > or < to the required subscriber alias. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The display shows Contact Alias. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 7 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid yellow. 8 If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Adding a New Contact Entry

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the and hold Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to {NEW CONTACT} and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 The display shows NAME. Use the keypad to enter the name. Press < to move one space to the left. 41 English Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen. 6 > or < to {ADD NUMBER} and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows TYPE 1 <DEFAULT TYPE>. 7 Press Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 8 > or < to the required channel and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 9 > or < to NUMBER 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT.The display shows NUMBER 1 and a cursor appears. Use the keypad to enter the number. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 42 English 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen. 11 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE once you have finished. 12 The display shows <ENTRY> STORED, confirming that the contact entry has been added. 13 The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. Deleting a Contact Entry

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 > or < to DELETE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows <ENTRY> CONFIRM DEL?. 5 Select YES to delete the entry. The display shows <ENTRY> DELETED and the radio returns to the main screen for Contacts. OR Select NO to return to the main screen for Contacts. Adding a Contact to a Call List or Phone List

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to the entry you want to add to the call list and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 > or < to ADD TO CALLLST or ADD TO PHONLST and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 5 The display shows <ENTRY> ADDED TO CALLLST or ADDED TO PHONLST, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. 6 The radio returns to the main display for Contacts.

Editing a Contact in a Call List or a Phone List Editing an Entry Alias

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 > or < to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 5 > or < to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 6 A cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. 43 English Editing as Entry ID

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 > or < to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 5 > or < to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 6 A cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the number. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 44 English 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. Editing a Call Type

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 > or < to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 5 > or < to TYPE and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 6 > or < to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK to select. 7 The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/

groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio can support up to 125 different scan lists. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List

Procedure:

1 > to SCNL 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SCNL. 3 > or < to view the members on the list. 4 Press the H to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. Editing the Scan List

This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. Note:

The maximum number of members for a trunking priority monitor scan list is 50; for a conventional scan list, 30; and for a talkgroup scan list, 250. Procedure:

Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button) and proceed to Step 3. OR Move the preprogrammed Scan List Programming switch to programming position and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to SCNL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SCNL. The display shows the lists that can be changed. 3 > or < to the entry you want to edit. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below RCL to view the next member of the scan list. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 > or < to select more channels to be added or deleted. OR Use the keypad to go directly to additional channels to be added or deleted. OR 45 English Use the Channel Knob to select additional channels to be added or deleted. 6 Move the Scan List Programming switch out of programming position. OR Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. Changing the Scan List Status

Procedure:

1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button). 2 The display shows the programming mode icon and the first list member. 3 > or < to the number you want to edit. 4 Press the button or press the Menu Select button directly below SEL once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. OR Press the button or press the Menu Select button directly below SEL, one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 5 > or < to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. 46 English OR Use the keypad to go directly to that scan list member. OR Use the Channel Knob to select another scan list member. 6 Long press the Scan List Programming to switch out of programming position. OR Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. Viewing and Changing the Priority Status

Procedure:

1 At the below SEL, DEL, and RCL screen, press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to view and/or change the priority status of the currently displayed channel. OR At the below SEL, DEL, and RCL screen, press the button or press the Menu Select button directly below SEL, one or more times to view and/or change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 2 A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. OR A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. OR A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-

One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. OR No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button, or turn the preprogrammed Scan switch to the Scan on or Scan off position, to start or stop scan. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > to SCAN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SCAN. 3 The display shows SCAN OFF if scan is disabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below SCAN to enable scan. OR The display shows SCAN ON and the scan status icon if A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s scan is enabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below SCAN to disable scan. 4 The radio returns to the Home screen.

Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only) Procedure:

1 > to MON. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below MON. 3 The brief MONITOR ON display indicates that the radio is disregarding the squelch code. While scanning for activity, you can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls. Respond to these types of calls as you would normally on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed.

Transmitting While the Scan is On

Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan 47 English Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below SCAN momentarily. Deleting a Nuisance Channel

If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise

(termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. Procedure:

1 When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted,

> or < to NUIS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below NUIS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below DELETE. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan

Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select button directly below PAGE or CALL. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing H or pressing the Menu Select button below either PAGE or CALL. 48 English Restoring a Nuisance Channel

Procedure:

To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the following:

Turn scan off, then on. OR Change modes. OR Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On

While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list

(except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DYNP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press H momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. Restoring Priorities in a Scan List

Procedure:

To restore the original channel priorities in a scan list, do one of the following:

Press the Menu Select button directly below RCL. OR Turn scan off, then on. OR Change channels. OR Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Hang Up (HUB)

To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box (HUB). You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. Note:

Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. 49 English Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a call alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, OR when you press the PTT button. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Answering a Call Alert

Procedure:

1 When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tone and the green LED blinks. 2 The call received icons blinks and the display shows PAGE RECEIVED. 3 Press the PTT button to answer. OR Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 50 English See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 28 or Making a Private Call (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) on page 28 for more information on returning the call. Sending a Call Alert Page

Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and time is up. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5 of the procedure below. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to PAGE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PAGE. 3 > or < to select the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to send the page. 5 The display shows PAGING...<NUMBER> or <ALIAS>. 6 If the call alert page is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. OR If the call alert page is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. 7 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return o the main screen for Contacts. 8 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return o the main screen for Contacts. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to CALL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. 3 > or < to select the required ID, press the PTT button to initiate the call. 4 If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows SEND PAGE?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to send the call alert page. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below NO to exit the screen without sending the call alert page. 6 The display shows PAGING...<ALIAS>. 7 If the call alert page is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. OR A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s In-Call User Alert

You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Procedure:

1 Make sure you are in Home mode where the default zone and mode are being displayed. 2 > or < to scroll to the VMUT. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT or the VMut preprogrammed button again to turn the feature off and you will be able to hear to normal dispatch calls. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below VMUT or the VMut programmed button momentarily toggles between Voice mute on and Voice mute off. VOICE MUTE ON shown on the display indicates that the radio is muted to normal dispatch calls. 51 English Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Orange button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports 5 Emergency Alarms:

Emergency Call Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Silent Emergency Alarm Special Considerations for Emergencies Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. Note:

To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 52 English Sending an Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. Procedure:

1 Press preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. 2 A dispatcher acknowledgment ACK RECEIVED display follows. AND, Trunking Only:

A high-pitched tone indicates that the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 3 The radio automatically returns to normal operation. No further action is required. Sending an Emergency Call

Procedure:

1 Press preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. 2 Press the PTT button and announce your emergency. 3 After completing the emergency call, press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds. 4 The EMERGENCY display disappears, and the radio returns to normal operation. 6 The EMERGENCY display disappears, and the radio returns to normal operation.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature allows you send an Emergency Alarm to another radio. Upon acknowledgement, both radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. If the radio has both emergency call and alarm features, it automatically proceeds to the call mode after the alarm is acknowledged. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button to activate the emergency call/alarm feature. 2 The display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. 3 A high-pitched tone sounds, indicating that the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. A dispatcher acknowledgment (four high-pitched tones) follows, accompanied by an ACK RECEIVED display. 4 Press the PTT button and announce your emergency. 5 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit from the emergency state altogether. Turning the radio off also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to another radio without any audio or visual indicator. Upon acknowledgement, your radios microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the other radio without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. Note:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button to activate the silent alarm feature. 2 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit the silent alarm mode. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. 53 English ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non Server Mode Note:

The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. Selecting or Changing ARS Mode

Procedure:

1 After the zone you want is displayed, toggle until the display shows the required channel. OR

> and hold to CHAN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN. The display shows the current zone and the channel blinking. 3 > or rotate the Channel Knob to the desired channel. 4 Press H to confirm the displayed zone and channel. Special Considerations for Emergencies

If you press the emergency button while in a channel that has no emergency capability, a low-pitched tone sounds. If the unit is out of the range of the system and/or the emergency alarm is not acknowledged, a tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If you press the emergency button, then change to a mode that has no emergency capability, the display shows NO EMERGENCY and a continuous low-pitched tone sounds until a valid emergency mode is selected or until the emergency is cancelled. When an emergency is active, changing to another mode where emergency is enabled (trunked or conventional) causes an emergency alarm and/or emergency call to be active on the new mode. Automatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two

(2) modes:

s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 54 English Accessing the User Login Feature

This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example:

Text Messaging Service) will take on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. The user login feature can be accessed by selecting a menu item on the display or through a programmable button. Note:

Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters A-Z, small letters a-z, numbers 0-9, *, #, -, /

and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight (8) characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight (8) characters or more. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Logging In as a User

Procedure:

1 > to USER. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below USER. 3 The display shows the User Login screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below ID. 5 A blinking cursor appears beside ID.Use the keypad to enter a username using the keypad multi-tap function. OR

> to scroll through the list of predefined usernames. Press the Menu Select button to select a predefined username. OR Press and hold > to scroll through the list of predefined usernames at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button to select a predefined username. 6 If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows Invalid ID. Repeat Step 5. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below PIN. 7 A blinking cursor appears beside PIN. Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. 55 English Logging Out

Procedure:

1 > to LOGT. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGT. 3 Display shows the User Login Indicator icon and CLEAR PRIVATE DATA?. 4 Select YES to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary PRIVATE DATA CLEARED. OR Select NO to keep your private data. Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft and Sent folder. The next radio user will be able to access your Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number will appear as asterisks. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGN. 9 In ARS server mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, IN PPROGRESS and CNCL. OR In ARS non-server mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, LOGGED IN and LOGT. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows OFFLINE and LOGT. 10 If the username is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows LOGIN FAILED. Repeat step 5. OR If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows LOGIN FAILED. Repeat Step 7. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to cancel the login in progress screen and return to the initial user login screen. OR Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and LOGGED IN and LOGT. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 56 English Text Messaging Service (TMS) This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. There are three (3) types of text messages:

A new text message (free form message) A predefined message (quick text message) An edited quick text message The main menu consists of the following options:

Inbox Compose Drafts Sent Note:

SeeStatus Icons on page 17 for more details on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 18 for more details on each menu option. Accessing TMS Feature

Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and time is up. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS button to access the TMS feature screen. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS button to access the Inbox screen. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 > or < to scroll through the main menu options. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 57 English

Note:

Composing and Sending a New Text Message During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-

tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B->C, a->b->c. During the num lock mode, except for 1, pressing the keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message (no multi-tap). Procedure:

1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 > or < to COMPOSE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to return to the TMS feature screen. 4 > or < to TEXT MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to compose a new message. 5 A blinking cursor appears on the COMPOSE screen. Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 58 English Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN once the message is composed. 7 > or < to SEND MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 8 > or < to scroll through the address list and press the Menu Select button below SEL to select the required address. OR

> or < to {OTHER RECPNT} and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. A blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 9 Press the Menu Select button below SEND to send the message. OR Press the PTT button to send the message. 10 The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. 11 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows MSG SENT. OR If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows SEND FAILED. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 61 for more information. You can also select the SAVE TO DRAFTS option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 65 for more details. Sending a Quick Text Message

Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 > or < to COMPOSE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to return to the TMS feature screen. 4 > or < to QUICK TEXT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL for a predefined message. 5 > or < to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required message. 59 English 6 The message appears on the COMPOSE screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 8 > or < to SEND MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to send the message. 9 The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 11 > or < to SEND MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 12 > or < to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR

> or < to {OTHER RECPNT} and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. A blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 13 Press the Menu Select button below SEND to send the message. OR Press the PTT button to send the message. 14 The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. 15 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows MSG SENT. OR If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows SEND FAILED. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 61 for more information.

Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features Before sending your message, you can append a priority message and/or a request reply to your message.

Note:

Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message The Priority Message icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 58 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 > or < to MARK IMPORTANT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to indicate the message as important. 3 The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message

Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 58 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 > or < to MARK AS NORMAL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to remove the priority status from the message. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 61 English

Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 64 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 > or < to MARK AS NORMAL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to indicate the message as important. AND

> or < to NO REQ REPLY and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to request for a reply. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message

Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 58 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 > or < to MARK AS NORMAL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to indicate the message as important. AND

> or < to NO REQ REPLY and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to request for a reply. 3 The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English

Managing Text Messages Receiving a Text Message

Note: When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send back a notification that the radio has received such message. Procedure:

When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox and go to Step3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 The new message icon appears and the display momentarily shows NEW MSG. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the message. 3 The display shows alias or ID with the sender of the latest received message on top. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. Note:

> or < to read the message if fills more than one screen. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox screen and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 > or < to INBX and press the Menu Select button below SEL. 4 The display shows alias or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message. 5 > or < to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below SEL to view the message. 63 English While on the review message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN, DEL, or BACK to access the option. Select OPTN to configure the message settings. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 57 for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English Replying to a Received Text Message

Note:

The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. Procedure:

1 > or <to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below SEL to view the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RPLY to reply to a message. 3 > or < to TEXT MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. OR

> or < to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL for a predefined message. OR

> or < to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required message. 4 A blinking cursor appears on the COMPOSE screen. OR The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN once you have finished writing the message. 7 > or < to SEND MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to send the message. 8 The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. Note:

You can append a priority message and/or a request reply to your message. Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 61 for more details. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Accessing the Drafts Folder

This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Procedure:

1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 > or < to DRAFTS and press the Menu Select button below SEL. 4 The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. 5 > or < to the required text message press the Menu Select button below SEL to view the message. Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT, DEL, or BACK to access the option. Select EDIT to edit the message before sending it. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. 65 English 4 The display shows alias or ID, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. 5 > or < to the required alias or ID and press the Menu Select button below SEL to view the message. Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN, DEL, or BACK to access the option. Select OPTN to send to the message. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest text message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 57 for more information. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 > or < to SENT and press the Menu Select button below s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A SEL. 66 English Sending a Sent Text Message

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN while viewing the message. 2 > or < to SEND MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to send the message. 3 > or < to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR

> or < to {OTHER RECPNT} and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. A blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 4 Press the Menu Select button below SEND or the PTT button to send the message. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. Note:

You can append a priority message and/or a request reply to your message. Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 61 for more details. Deleting a Text Message

Procedure:

From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen:

1 > or < to scroll through the messages. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete the current message OR Press the Menu Select button directly below CLR to delete all messages. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG on the display. 67 English Secure Operation Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. Selecting Secure Transmissions

Procedure:

Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear switch to the secure position. Note:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-

only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows CLEAR TX only. Selecting Clear Transmissions

Procedure:

Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear switch to the clear position. Note:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for secure-

only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows SECURE TX ONLY. The radio will not transmit until you set the Secure/

Clear switch to the secure position. Managing Encryption Loading an Encryption Key

Note: Refer to the key-variable loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. The radio will not transmit until you set the SECURE/

CLEAR switch to the clear position. Procedure:

1 Attach the KVL to your radio. 2 The display shows KEYLOADING, and all other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English 3 Select the required keys and press the Menu Select button directly below LOAD on the KVL. This loads the encryption keys into your radio. Selecting an Encryption Key

Procedure:

4 When the key has been loaded successfully, the radio sounds a short tone for single-key radios. OR When the key has been loaded successfully, the radio sounds an alternating tone for multikey radios. Using the Multikey Feature

This feature allows the radio to be equipped with as many as 48 different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied

(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through radio service software. In addition, you can have operator-selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. Trunked Multikey If you use your radio for both conventional and trunked applications, you have to strap your encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, you may strap a different key to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-

selectable key erasure. 1 < or > to KEY. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KEY. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 < or > to scroll through the encryption keys. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit. Note:

If the selected key is erased, a momentary keyfail tone sounds and the display shows KEY FAIL. OR If the selected key is not allowed, a momentary illegal key tone sounds and the display shows ILLEGAL KEY. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 69 English Selecting a Keyset

This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. Note: Press H, the PTT button, or the EXIT menu selection to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Procedure:

1 < or > to KSET. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KSET. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. 3 < or > to scroll through the keysets. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the newly selected keyset. 5 The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. Using the Key Zeroization Feature

This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. Procedure:

1 < or > to ERAS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ERAS. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 < or > to the desired encryption key. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below ALL to delete all keys. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below SNGL to current shown key. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below ABRT to abort this screen and return to Home screen.

Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. Procedure:

1 < or > to REKY. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below REKY. 3 Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. OR Press the PTT button again, or the H or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. 4 If the rekey operation fails, a bad-key tone sounds and the display shows REKEY FAIL. Note:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). This key must be loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. Global Positioning System (GPS) Enabled Your GPS Enabled feature uses information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the approximate geographical location of your radio, expressed as latitude and longitude. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are very difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Understanding the GPS Feature

The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites, to establish the location co-ordinates, maximizing your view of clear unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

In underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles 71 English Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Note:

Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within meters from your actual location, but sometimes further away. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note:

The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English Enhancing GPS Performance

Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, please note the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and a large amount of open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)

This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. This feature is only available when a location enabled accessory such as the GPS Antenna is used. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. Programmable Waypoints User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be deleted one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Waypoints Fixed location coordinates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destination coordinates are editable. Coordinates cannot be deleted. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit.

Note:

Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature An ON menu key may be present on the location menu if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed GPS button to toggle the Outdoor Location feature on or off. OR Follow the procedure below to turn on the GPS:

1 < or > to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. The display shows LOCATION OFF <LATITUDE>. 3 < or > to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix if you want. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below ON to turn on the GPS. The display shows PREVIOUS LOC <LATITUDE>. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below RFSH to obtain a new location fix. 6 The top line temporarily displays PLEASE WAIT while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. 7 Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current latitude. Toggle to see the longitude, time and date. The location coordinates are updated automatically every four minutes while the location signal is present. 73 English 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. OR Follow the procedure below to turn off the GPS:

1 < or > to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. The display shows PREVIOUS LOC <LATITUDE>. 3 < or > to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN to turn off the GPS. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. The radio also exits the menu if the emergency button is pressed. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A

Saving a Waypoint 74 English Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 < or > to SAVE AS WAYPNT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 3 A blinking cursor appears in the Save as waypoint screen. Use the keypad to type the alias via multi-tap. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. 5 You CURRENT LOC SAVED AS <WAYPOINT NAME> on the display. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. Viewing a Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 < or > to WAYPOINTS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Waypoints name. 4 < or > to desired waypoints name. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 6 > to VIEW. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 8 > again to view UTC and date the waypoint was detected. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to previous Waypoint screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to Location screen. OR Press H to return to Home screen. OR Press PTT button to return to Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Editing the Alias of a Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. The display shows Options screen. 2 < or > to WAYPOINTS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Waypoints screen. 4 > or < to desired waypoints. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 6 > or < to EDIT NAME. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Edit Name screen. 8 A blinking cursor appears in the Save as waypnt screen. Use the keypad to type the alias via multi-tap. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase 75 English mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. 10 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> UPDATED. 11 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint

Procedure:

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. The display shows Options screen. 2 < or > to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Waypoints screen. 3 > or < to desired waypoints. 76 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 5 > or < to EDIT Location. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Edit Name screen. 7 A blinking cursor appears in the Save as waypnt screen. Use the keypad to type the number. Press < to move to the next number/coordinates. Press > to move back to the previous number/chordates. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. 9 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> UPDATED. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

1 > or < to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. The display shows Options screen. 4 > or < to WAYPOINTS. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Waypoints screen. 6 > or < to desired waypoints. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL and then skip to step 9. 8 > or < to DELETE. The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME>

CONFIRM DEL?. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete. 10 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME>DELETED. Deleting All Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

1 > or < to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. The display shows Options screen. 4 > or < to WAYPOINTS. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Waypoints screen. 6 > or < to desired waypoints. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 8 > or < to DELETE ALL. The display shows ALL SAVED WAYP CONFIRM DEL?. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete. 10 The display shows ALL SAVED WAYP DELETED. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s

Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 > or < to DIST FRM HERE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 3 The display shows a waypoints. 77 English 4 > or < to the required waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 5 The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates.

Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the home (default) display so that you can which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English Trunking System Controls Using the Failsoft System

The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communications during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. The failsoft condition is indicated by a faint beeping tone every nine seconds (radio unsquelched) until the trunking system returns to normal operation. To continue, in Failsoft, to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. Procedure:

1 Rotate the Channel knob to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. Going Out-of-Range

OUT OF RANGE when your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. Procedure:

1 A low-pitched tone sounds. AND/OR The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and OUT OF RANGE. 2 Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until:

It locks onto a control channel. OR It locks onto a failsoft channel. OR It is turned off. SmartZone

The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Head the RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Using Site Trunking Feature

If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and SITE TRUNKING. Note: When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. 79 English Locking and Unlocking a Site

This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button to toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to SITE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SITE. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOCK to lock the site. The display shows SITE LOCKED. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below UNLK to unlock the site. The display shows SITE UNLOCKED. 4 The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. Viewing and Changing a Site

This feature allows you to view the number of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English Viewing the Current Site

Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. 2 The display momentarily shows the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator

(RSSI). Changing the Current Site

Procedure:

1 Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. 2 A tone sounds and the display momentarily shows SCANNING SITE. When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Trunked Announcement

The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. Ruthless Preemption:

When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-Ruthless Preemption:

When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-type busy tone, followed by a call back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. Initiating an Announcement

If your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls:

Procedure:

1 Press the Channel knob to locate the announcement-group mode. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 Press the microphone PTT button to initiate the announcement. Utilities Viewing Recent Calls List

This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing only) The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Procedure:

1 > or < to RCNT. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RCNT to access the Recent Calls feature screen. 3 > or < to scroll through the list. 81 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to Home screen. OR Press H or the PTT button to return to the Home screen. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Selecting the Power Level

You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Settings:

Select LOW for a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Select HIGH for a longer transmitting distance. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level Switch to toggle transmit power level between high and low power. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to PWR. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PWR. 3 The display shows LOW POWER and the low power icon. OR The display shows HIGH POWER and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile

This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. You can have up to a maximum of twelve (12) radio profiles programmed into your radio by a qualified radio technician. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Profile button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to PRFL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PRFL to access the Profiles feature screen. 3 > or < to scroll through the menu selections. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required radio profile. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the screen without making any changes. 5 The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias

This feature allows you to display or hide the radio alias (name). Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below MYID. 2 The display momentarily shows RADIO ID OFF, and the radio alias disappears from the Home screen. OR The display momentarily shows RADIO ID ON, and the radio alias appears on the Home screen. Controlling the Display Backlight

You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radios display. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

The backlight setting also affects the Menu Select buttons, the Menu Navigation buttons and the keypad backlighting accordingly. Procedure:

Press the l button to toggle the backlight off or on. OR Press any key of the keypad, the Menu Select or Menu Navigation buttons, or any programmable radio controls or buttons to turn the backlight on. Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button to turn the tones off or on. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to MUTE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below MUTE. 3 The display momentarily shows TONES OFF, indicating that the keypad tones are disabled. OR The display momentarily shows TONES ON, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the keypad tones are enabled. 83 English Turning Voice Mute On or Off

You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button to turn the feature off or on. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to VMUT. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT. 3 The display momentarily shows VOICE MUTE OFF, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the feature is disabled. OR The display momentarily shows VOICE MUTE ON, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the feature is enabled. Note:

You will hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. Procedure:

1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LEDs goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The LEDs relight and the timer resets. 3 Press the PTT button to re-transmit. The time-out timer restarts and the red LED lights up. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English Using the Time-Out Timer

This feature turns off your radios transmitter. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician.

Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. 1 Procedure:

> or < to SQL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SQL. The display shows SQUELCH XX, where XX is a squelch level setting of 0 to 15. 3 Press H to return to the selected channel. Analog Options

Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available (preprogrammed) per channel. Option Result Carrier squelch (C) You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. PL or DPL Digital Options

One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Consult your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Result A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Digital Carrier-

You hear any digital traffic. Operated Squelch (COS) Normal Squelch You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code. Selective Switch You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code and correct talkgroup. 85 English Using the PL Defeat Feature

This feature allows you to override any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed to a channel. The radio will also unmute to any digital activity on a digital channel. Procedure:

Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. You hear any activity on the channel. OR The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note: When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Using the Digital PTT ID Feature

This feature allows you to the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. Your radios ID number is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, your radios ID is sent continuously during the voice message. Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)

Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. Three variations of smart PTT are available:

Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if secure-

equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. Description You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. Quick-Key Override This feature can work in conjunction with either of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-inhibit state by quick-keying the radio. In other words, two PTT button presses within the preprogrammed time limit.

Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Radio Information IP Display Control Assignments Soft ID (If Enabled) Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Accessing Radio Information

This feature displays the following information of your radio:

Host Version Model Number Serial Number ESN Flash Code Flash Size CH Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Memory Size Tuning Version Processor Version RF Band Secure Version DSP Version Press H at any time to return to the Home screen. Note:

Procedure:

1 > or < to INFO. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 3 > or < to RADIO INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 The display shows the Information screen. 5 > or < to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to previous screen. OR Press H to exit and return to the home display. Viewing IP Information

This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to INFO. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 87 English 3 > or < to IP INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 The display shows the IP info screen. 5 > or < to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to previous screen. OR Press H to exit and return to the Home display. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Viewing Control Assignments

This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. Programmable Features on page 10 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. Procedure:

1 > or <to INFO. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 3 The display shows the Control Map screen. 4 > or < to CONTROL MAP. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 88 English 6 You the Radio Info screen appears. 7 > or < to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to previous screen. OR Press H to exit and return to the Home display. Editing the Soft ID

This feature allows you to change your username. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to INFO. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 3 U or D to SOFT ID and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 The display shows the current Soft ID. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT to edit the current Soft ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. 6 A blinking cursor appears in the EDIT SOFT ID screen. Use the keypad to edit the text. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to save the new Soft ID and return to the previous screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen.

Optional External Alarms (Horn and Lights) All control heads can be equipped for external alarms (horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. Note:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. Non-Permanent Horn and Lights

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. If necessary, use the > or < button to access other available options within the menu. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to access the available options. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s), until it is turned off. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L a second time to turn off the alarm(s). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Permanent Horn and Lights

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled.The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts back to the selected mode. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L a second time to turn off the alarm(s). 89 English Changing the Selected Alarms

Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below H/L until a tone sounds and the display indicates the currently selected alarm. Press the appropriate Menu Select button right below the menu entry to review the choices until the display shows the desired alarm:

H/L HORN/LITES ON (both horn and lights) LGTS LIGHTS ON HORN HORN ON Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On

When a call is received, the vehicles horn sounds for four seconds, and/or the car lights turn on for 60 seconds. The time interval can be modified by a qualified radio technician. The display will show the type of call received (CALL, PAGE, or PHONE) and the selected mode name. Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms

Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button or any control-head button to turn off the external alarm(s). s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English 2 To rearm the horn and lights feature, press the Menu Select button H/L momentarily. Note:

Pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, PAGE or PHON will turn off the external alarm(s) and place you directly in that feature. The Volume knob and the Mode knob have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms

To turn off the external alarm(s), press the PTT button or any control head button other than the Menu Select button directly below H/L. Note:

Pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, PAGE or PHON turns off the external alarm(s) and places you directly in that feature. When the external alarm(s) are turned off, they will be automatically rearmed. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below H/L turns off the external alarm(s) and exits the horn and lights feature. To rearm the feature, press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. Note:

Note:The Volume knob and the Mode knob have no effect on the state of the external alarms. Helpful Tips The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems.

!

+ = K J E  

The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. l H e p f u l i T p s 91 English s p T i l u f p e H l 92 English Accessories Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed in this chapter. Contact your dealer for details. Antennas . page 92 Audio . page 93 Control Station. page 93 Footswitches and PTTs . page 94 Keypad . page 94 Microphones . page 95 Motorcycle . page 95 Mounting Solution . page 95 Power Cables . page 96 Programming/Accessory Cables . page 96 Siren . page 97 Antennas Ant roof top unity gain 800 (HAF4002_) Ant 3dB low-profile 762-870 (HAF4013_) Ant 3dB elevated feed 762-870 (HAF4014_) Ant 1/4 wave 762-870MHz (HAF4016_) Ant 3dB co-linear 762-870MHz (HAF4017_) Ant, mobile, 800/900MHz (RRA4914_) Ant 3dB mcycle 762-870MHz (HAF4015_) Ant 3dB low profilemcyc 762-870MHz (HAF4018_) Roof top, 1/4 wave 136-144MHz (HAD4006_) Roof top, 1/4 wave 144-152 MHz (HAD4007_) Roof top, 1/4 wave, 152-162 MHz (HAD4008_) Roof top, 1/4 wave, 162-174 MHz (HAD4009_) Ant 3dB, roof mt, 136-174 MHz (RAD4010AR_) Ant roof mt wb VHF 136/162 (HAD4016_) Ant roof mt wb VHF 146/174 (HAD4017_) VHF ant wideband 136-174 MHz (HAD4021_) GPS (HLN7005_) A c c e s s o r i e s 92 English Audio 7.5 Watt Speaker (water resistant) (HSN4038_) 13 Watt Speaker (motorcycle) (HSN6003_) Standard speaker 8 Ohm (HSN4031_) Standard speaker 3.2 Ohm (HSN4032_) Control Station Power supply 15A Hi power (HPN4007_) Desk tray w/speaker (HLN6042_) 110V Line cord (3060665A04) Euro cord (3060665A05) UK cord (3002120F02) Argentina cord (3085801L01) s e i r o s s e c c A 93 English Footswitches and PTTs Keypad Emergency footswitch (HLN5113_) PTT footswitch button (GLN7278_) Emergency push button (HLN5131_) Accessory PTT (RLN5926_) External alarm cable (HKN4258_) External alarm buzzer 110MA (HLN6953_) External alarm relays (HLN6969_) Auxiliary switch panel (HLN1224_) Direct Entry Keypad (DEK) (HLN1392_) DEK XTL cable adaptor (HKN6189_)

(DEK) Siren PA deck 8 button (H1336_)

(DEK) Status message deck 8 button (H1338_)

(DEK) Status message deck 16 button (H1339_) DEK 8 button (HLN1362_) DEK 24 button (HLN1363_) DEK 16 button (HLN1364_) A c c e s s o r i e s 94 English Microphones Motorcycle Motorocycle enclosure - black US (HLN1446_) Motorocycle enclosure - white US (HLN1445_) Mounting Solution Hi Power Quick Release w/ Lock ( ) Mid power Key lock (HLN6372_) Mid power Trunnion (HLN7002_) Traditional Palm Microphone (HMN1090_) Keypad Microphone (HMN4079_) Smart Visor Microphone (RMN5054_) GCAI Keypad Handset (HMN4097_) GCAI non Keypad Handset (HMN4098_) Desktop Microphone New-Design (RMN5070_) Motorcycle Microphone (HMN1089_) Microphone hang up clip (HLN9073_) HLN9073B Hang up clip,0780257N01 (HLN5391_) Motorcycle water resistant mic w/DB9 connector

(HMN1079_) HandSet/Hangup Armoured Cable w/GCAI connector

(HKN1018_) s e i r o s s e c c A 95 English Power Cables Programming/Accessory Cables 10' Power Cable Dash Mountl/Mid Power (HKN4191_) 20' Power Cable Dash Mount (HKN4192_) 100W power cable (HKN6110_) 10' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6170_) 17' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6169_) 30' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6168_) 50' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6167_) 75' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6166_) 115' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6165_) 131' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6164_) A c c e s s o r i e s J6 RS232 cable (HKN6122_) Audio Cable Adapter (HKN6158_) Audio Cable Data (HKN6159_) Cable Kit 6' data (HKN6160_) Cable Kit 20' data (HKN6161_) Cable Access Data USB XTL5000 (HKN6163_) USB cable (6ft) (HKN6163_) USB cable (15ft) (HKN6172_) Keyloader adaptor GCAI MMP/Hirose 1.5 cable (HKN6182_) RS232 GCAI programming cable (HKN6183_) USB GCAI-MMP programming cable (HKN6184_) CH power, spkr, audio headset jacks (HKN6187_) CH power and spkr (HKN6188_) CH VIP connector (HKN6196_) Ignition Sense Cable (3085378F01/HLN6863_) Keyload cable KVL3000 plus to Hirose (TKN8531_) 26pin connector for CHIB interface (HLN6961_) O3 Can 17' extension cable (PMLN4958_) 96 English O3 accessory cable (remote extender) V3-10331

(PMLN4959_) GCAI microphone extension cable- Potato microphone

(PMKN4033_) Hirose RS232 programming cable V3-10349 (PMLN4957_) Hirose Keyload cable V3-10184 (PMLN4956_) Hirose to Hirose extension cable V3-10413 ( ) Siren Siren (HLN1439_) Siren switchbox (HLN6819_) Siren cable (HKN6146_) Siren PA round chrome skr (TDN6251_) Siren PA Rectangular chrome (TDN6252_) Siren PA underhood-grey (TDN6253_) Siren PA round-grey (TDN6254_) s e i r o s s e c c A 97 English A c c e s s o r i e s 98 English Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Take a moment to review the following:

Special Channel Assignments. page 98 Operating Frequency Requirements. page 99 F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M i

:

x d n e p p A Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel

If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. 98 English Non-Commercial Call Channel

For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Channel Number Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note: Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

18 19 20

*

22

*

Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 Receive 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 A p p e n d x

:

i M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F 99 English Frequency (MHz) Transmit 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 Receive 157.200 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 Channel Number 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

84 85 86 87 88 Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 Receive 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M i

:

x d n e p p A Channel Number 24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

65 66 67**

68 69 71 72 100 English

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only

*** Guard band Note: A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. A p p e n d x

:

i M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F 101 English Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. Term Conventional Definition Acknowledgment of communication. A group of characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. Tone Private-Line or Digital Private-Line. Used on conventional channels to make sure you hear only the communication meant for you. In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-

way/data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Term ACK Channel Coded Squelch Control Channel y r a s s o G l 102 English Cursor Digital Private- Line

(DPL) Coded Squelch Dispatcher Failsoft FCC Hang Up Home Display LCD Definition Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater. You share a frequency, or frequencies, with other users without the aid of a central controller to assign communication channels. Therefore, you should monitor each channel before transmitting to avoid interfering with another user who may be transmitting. A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on the display. A continuous, sub-audible data signal, transmitted with the carrier. An individual who has radio system management duties. A back-up system allowing you to communicate in a non-trunked, conventional mode should the trunked system fail. Federal Communications Commission. Disconnect. The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Liquid-Crystal Display. Term Mode Mode-Slaving Monitoring

(Conventional Operation) Page Push-To-Talk (PTT) button Repeater Definition A programmed combination of operating parameters; for example, a channel or talkgroup. Radio programmed to automatically give the proper operation for a given mode you have selected. Press a programmed monitor button to listen to another user active on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from talking over someone elses conversation. A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. The PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit (send) operation when pressed. Press this button to transmit; release it to receive. A conventional radio feature, in which you talk through a receive/transmit facility

(repeater) that re-transmits received signals in order to improve communications range and coverage. l G o s s a r y Term RF RSSI Squelch Standby Talkgroup Tone Private-Line

(PL) Coded Squelch Definition Radio Frequency. A part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). Received Signal Strength Indicator. The muting of audio circuits when received signal levels fall below a pre-determined threshold. With carrier squelch, you hear all channel activity which exceeds the radios preset squelch level. An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. An organization (or group) of radio users who communicate with each other, using the same communication path. A continuous sub-audible tone transmitted with the carrier. 103 English Term Trunking Zone Definition The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users (

Conventional). Allows radio users to share a smaller number of frequencies because a repeater, or communications path, is assigned to a talkgroup for the length of a conversation. A grouping of channels or talkgroups. y r a s s o G l 104 English Commercial Warranty and Service Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

APX 7500 O5 Control Head Product Accessories Two (1) Years One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y a n d S e r v i c e 105 English INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. C)Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

A) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. e c i v r e S d n a y t n a r r a W l a i c r e m m o C B) Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 106 English D)Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E) A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F) Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G)Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H)Freight costs to the repair depot. I) A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC Certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. J) Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K) Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

A) that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

B) that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C)should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y a n d S e r v i c e 107 English SERVICE Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for a period of three years from the date of shipment from the factory, or the date of delivery if purchased from an authorized Motorola two-

way radio dealer. For more information about ESP, contact the Motorola Radio Support Center, 2204 Galvin Drive, Elgin, IL 60123, 1-800-227-6772. e c i v r e S d n a y t n a r r a W l a i c r e m m o C 108 English Index A access 7 adjust volume 3 alert tones 19 assignable function 5 B button home 8 keypad 10 menu select 7 mode rocker 9 Push-To-Talk (PTT) 13 radio control 4 C control H home 8 I icons 14 text messaging status 16 K keypad 10 L LED indicators 17 M menu 7 mode rocker 9 P prgrammable feature 5 PTT(Push-To-Talk) 13 S status icons 14 T tones 19 U utility funtion 7 I n d e x 109 English x e d n I 110 English 2008by Motorola, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 06/09 1301 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Printed in the U.S.A.

*6875947M01*

6875947M01-A

 

 

m APX 7500 O5 Control Head Mobile Radio User Guide Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc. Address: Motorola, Inc. 1301 E. Algonquin Rd.Schaumburg, IL60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: APX 7500 conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. D e c l a r a t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y i English Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. y t i m r o f n o C f o n o i t a r a l c e D ii English Contents This User Guide contains all the information you need to use the APX 7500 Series Digital Mobile Radios. Declaration of Conformity . i Important Safety Information . viii Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance . viii Software Version . viii Computer Software Copyrights . ix Documentation Copyrights . ix Disclaimer . ix Getting Started . 1 How to Use This User Guide . 1 Notations Used in This Manual . 1 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You . 2 C o n t e n t s Preparing Your Radio for Use . 3 Turning On the Radio . 3 Adjusting the Volume . 3 Identifying Radio Controls . 4 Radio Parts and Controls . 4 O5 Control Head . 4 Programmable Features . 5 Assignable Radio Functions . 5 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . 6 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions . 7 Use the Menu Select Button (g). . 7 Using the Menu Select Buttons . 7 Using the Advance Programmable Buttons . 8 Using the Navigation Buttons . 8 Home Button . 8 Data Feature Button . 9 4-Way Navigation Button . 9 Volume Knob . 9 Channel Knob . 9 Using the Keypad . 10 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode . 10 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode . 11 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode . 12 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode . 13 iii English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . 14 Identifying Status Indicators . 14 Status Icons . 15 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . 17 Status Icons . 17 TMS Menu Options . 18 LED Indicators . 18 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . 19 Alert Tones . 20 Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts . 23 General Radio Operation . 24 Selecting a Zone . 24 Selecting a Radio Channel . 25 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call . 26 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call . 26 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

(Trunking, Digital Mode Only) . 26 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) . 27 Making a Radio Call . 27 Making a Talkgroup Call . 28 s t n e t n o C iv English Making a Private Call (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) . 28 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) . 29 Repeater or Direct Operation . 30 Monitoring Features . 30 Monitoring a Channel . 30 Conventional Mode Operation . 31 Advanced Features . 32 Advanced Call Features . 32 Calling a Phone Not in the List . 32 Receiving and Making a Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) . 33 Receiving a Selective Call . 33 Making a Selective Call . 33 Using the Talkgroup Call Feature

(Conventional Operation Only) . 34 Selecting a Talkgroup . 34 Sending a Status Call . 35 Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature

(Trunking, Digital Mode Only) . 35 Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) . 36 Classifying Regrouped Radios . 36 Multiple Control Head Features . 37 Multiple Control Head Features . 37 Setting the Initial Control Heads ID . 37 All Active Mode . 38 Intercom Feature . 38 One Active Mode . 38 Intercom Features . 39 Contacts . 40 Making a Private Call from Contacts . 40 Adding a New Contact Entry . 41 Deleting a Contact Entry . 42 Adding a Contact to a Call List or Phone List . 43 Editing a Contact in a Call List or a Phone List . 43 Editing an Entry Alias . 43 Editing as Entry ID . 44 Editing a Call Type . 44 Scan Lists . 45 Viewing a Scan List . 45 Editing the Scan List . 45 Changing the Scan List Status . 46 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status . 46 Scan . 47 Turning Scan On or Off . 47 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only) . 47 Transmitting While the Scan is On . 47 Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan . 47 Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan . 48 Deleting a Nuisance Channel . 48 Restoring a Nuisance Channel . 48 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On . 49 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List . 49 Hang Up (HUB) . 49 Call Alert Paging . 50 Answering a Call Alert . 50 Sending a Call Alert Page . 50 In-Call User Alert . 51 Emergency Operation . 52 Sending an Emergency Alarm . 52 Sending an Emergency Call . 52 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call . 53 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm . 53 Special Considerations for Emergencies . 54 Automatic Registration Service (ARS) . 54 Selecting or Changing ARS Mode . 54 Accessing the User Login Feature . 55 Logging In as a User . 55 Logging Out . 56 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . 57 Accessing TMS Feature . 57 Composing and Sending a New Text Message . 58 C o n t e n t s v English Sending a Quick Text Message . 59 Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features . 61 Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message . 61 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message . 61 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message . 62 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message . 62 Managing Text Messages . 63 Receiving a Text Message . 63 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox . 63 Replying to a Received Text Message . 64 Accessing the Drafts Folder . 65 Managing Sent Text Messages . 66 Viewing a Sent Text Message . 66 Sending a Sent Text Message . 67 Deleting a Text Message . 67 Secure Operation . 68 Selecting Secure Transmissions . 68 Selecting Clear Transmissions . 68 Managing Encryption . 68 Loading an Encryption Key . 68 Using the Multikey Feature . 69 Selecting an Encryption Key . 69 s t n e t n o C vi English Selecting a Keyset . 70 Using the Key Zeroization Feature . 70 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) . 71 Global Positioning System (GPS) Enabled . 71 Understanding the GPS Feature . 71 Enhancing GPS Performance . 72 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature . 73 Saving a Waypoint . 74 Viewing a Saved Waypoint . 75 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint . 75 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint . 76 Deleting All Saved Waypoint . 77 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint . 77 Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode . 78 Trunking System Controls . 78 Using the Failsoft System . 78 Going Out-of-Range . 79 SmartZone . 79 Using Site Trunking Feature . 79 Locking and Unlocking a Site . 80 Viewing and Changing a Site . 80 Viewing the Current Site . 80 Changing the Current Site . 80 When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. . 80 Trunked Announcement . 80 Initiating an Announcement . 81 Utilities . 81 Viewing Recent Calls List . 81 Selecting the Power Level . 82 Selecting a Radio Profile . 82 Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias . 83 Controlling the Display Backlight . 83 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off . 83 Turning Voice Mute On or Off . 84 Using the Time-Out Timer . 84 Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features . 85 Digital Options . 85 Using the PL Defeat Feature . 86 Using the Digital PTT ID Feature . 86 Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) . 86 Accessing General Radio Information . 86 Accessing Radio Information . 87 Viewing IP Information . 87 Viewing Control Assignments . 88 Editing the Soft ID . 88 Optional External Alarms (Horn and Lights) . 89 Non-Permanent Horn and Lights . 89 Permanent Horn and Lights . 89 Changing the Selected Alarms . 90 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On . 90 Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms . 90 Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms . 90 C o n t e n t s Helpful Tips . 91 Accessories . 92 Antennas . 92 Audio . 93 Control Station . 93 Footswitches and PTTs . 94 Keypad . 94 Microphones . 95 Motorcycle . 95 Mounting Solution . 95 Power Cables . 96 Programming/Accessory Cables . 96 Siren . 97 vii English Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range . 98 Special Channel Assignments . 98 Emergency Channel . 98 Non-Commercial Call Channel . 99 Operating Frequency Requirements . 99 Glossary . 102 Commercial Warranty and Service . 105 Index . 109 s t n e t n o C viii English Important Safety Information Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance Before using this product, read the operating instructions for safe usage contained in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio.

+ = K J E  

ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to occupational use only to satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements. Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio (Motorola Publication part number 6881095C99) to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorola.com/governmentandenterprise Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the radio's software version R02.00.00 or later. Accessing Radio Information on page 87 to determine your radio's software version. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. I m p o r t a n t S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n viii English Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. s t h g i r y p o C e r a w t f o S r e t u p m o C ix English Getting Started Take a moment to review the following:

How to Use This User Guide. page 1 Notations Used in This Manual . page 1 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You. page 2 How to Use This User Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX 7500 Mobiles. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of WARNING, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed.

W A R N I N G

+ = K J E  

An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Note:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which is essential to emphasize. 1 English The following special notations identify certain items:

Example Home button or H PHONE

Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the radios display. This means Press the right side of the 4-way Navigation button. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio preprogrammed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 2 English Preparing Your Radio for Use Turning On the Radio . page 3 Adjusting the Volume. page 3 Turning On the Radio Press the Power On/Off Button briefly. You see red, yellow and green LEDs light up. The display then shows Zone and channel text, and menu items display on the screen. The backlight will turn on to the last selected dim level. Note:

Power On/

Off Button Pressing the Power Button before the LED lights up will be ignored. A CH MISMATCH error upon turning on your radio, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. The radio then performs a self check. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. To turn off the radio, press and hold the Power On/Off Button after the LEDs light up. Adjusting the Volume To increase the volume, rotate the Volume knob clockwise to increase the volume. To decrease the volume, rotate the Volume knob counterclockwise. Volume Knob P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i Note:

Note:

If FAIL ##/## appears in the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If ERROR ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, refer to the Troubleshootingsection. 3 English Identifying Radio Controls Take a moment to review the following:

Radio Parts and Controls . page 4 Programmable Features . page 5 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions . page 7 Using the Keypad . page 10 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . page 14 l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 4 English Radio Parts and Controls O5 Control Head

16 Volume Knob 15 Dim Button 14 Home Button 13 Power On/Off Button 12 Indicators 11 Channel Knob 10 Emergency*

9 Push-to-Talk

(PTT) Button 8 Side Button 1*

5 Navigation Button*

LED Indicators 4 Menu Entries 3 7 Side Button 2*

6 Side Button 3*

2 Menu Select Button*

1 Indicators Terminal for Microphone

*These radio controls/buttons are programmable. Data Feature Button Home Button

(Microphone) 17 18 Keypad Numbers 1, 2 and 3 *

19 22 21 20 Navigation Button

(Microphone) Cancel Button

() Okay/Select Button ()

*These radio controls/buttons are programmable. Programmable Features Any references in this manual to a control that is preprogrammed means that the control must be programmed by a dealer or a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software, in order to assign a feature to that control. The programmable buttons can be programmed as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press:

Press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Assignable Radio Functions

Call Alert Allows the radio to functions like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Call Response Allows you to answer a private call. Channel Selects a channel. Contacts Selects the Contacts menu. Dynamic Priority (Trunking Only) Allows any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Info Displays the information of the radio. IP Displays the IP (Internet Protocol) information of the radio. Monitor Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Nuisance Delete Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel, from the scan list. The designated transmit channel refers to the users selected zone/channel combination from which scan is initiated. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 5 English Phone Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. PL Defeat Overrides any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that is preprogrammed to a channel. Private Call Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Profiles Allows for easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Recent Calls Allows for easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Rekey Request Notifies the dispatcher that you want a new encryption keys. Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Scan List Programming Selects the scan list for editing. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Secure/Clear Toggles secure transmission on or off. Select Selects the assigned list for editing. Selective Call (Digital Modes Only) Calls an assigned radio. Site Lock/Unlock Locks onto a specific site. Site Search Performs site search for AMSS (Automatic Multiple Site Select) or SmartZone operation. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 6 English Status (Astro 25 Trunking Only) Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Ext PA On/Off Toggles the audio routing between the connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the radios internal public address (PA) system. PA On/Off Toggles the radios internal public address (PA) system on or off. TMS Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Login Automatically registers with the server. Zone Select Allows selection from a list of zones. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones on or off. Backlight Toggles display backlight on or off. Horns/Lights Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Keypad Mute Toggles the keypad tones on or off. Dim Changes the display brightness. Speaker Activates external speaker to share your call with your group. Squelch Toggles squelch level between normal and tight. TX Power Level Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Voice Mute Toggles voice mute on or off. Volume Set Adjusts the volume of the speakers. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following ways:

A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Using the Menu Select Buttons

The Menu Select buttons allow to access the menu entries of features. Note:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:

Press the Menu Select button (g) directly below CHAN. OR Menu Select Button Use the Menu Select Button (g). I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 7 English Using the Advance Programmable Buttons

There are two special features which are designed to help you to shorten the process on certain common features Emergency Button*

Menu Select Button*

Side Button 1 Side Button 2 Side Button 3 Keypad Numbers 1,2 and 3

* These programmable buttons support the One Touch Button feature. These programmable buttons support the Mode Select Button feature.

(Quick Access) One Touch Button Enters a menu with a short press on the preprogrammed One Touch button. Call, Page, Phone, Status and Message can be assigned to these buttons. Mode Select Button Programs the current zone and channel to a Mode Select button with a long press on the Mode Select button. After the buttons are programmed, you can return to the preprogrammed zone and channel with a short press on the programmed Mode Select button.

Using the Navigation Buttons Home Button

The H button returns you to the home (default) display. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the H button is also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. Note:

Some features do not require you to press H to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. The H button also can revert to home channel. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 8 English Data Feature Button

Use this button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. Volume Knob

Use this Volume Knob to adjust the volume of the speakers by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. 4-Way Navigation Button

Use this button to scroll through the radios lists or items in the display, or both. Channel Knob

Use this Channel Knob to scroll the channels by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 9 English Using the Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the keypad microphone (Motorola part number: HMN4079_) to access your radios features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The tables below show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.

Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode 14

15

16

17 18 19

20

) 21 l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 7 9

5

Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

13

4

11

12

3

, C F I L O R V Y 2 Key 1 1 1

. 2 A B 3 D E 4 G H 5 J K 6 M N 7 P Q 8 T U 9 W X 0 Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode.

* Space

# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. S 8 Z 10 English

Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode 14

7 9

5

Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

13

4

11

12

3

, c f i l o r v y 2

. b e h k n q u x Key 1 1 1 2 a 3 d 4 g 5 j 6 m 7 p 8 t 9 w 0 Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode.

* Space

# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. s z 15

16

17

18 19 20

21

) I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 11 English 15

16

17

18 19 20

21

Keypad Characters Numeric Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

12

13

11

9

7 14

3

, 2

. 5

4

Key 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0

* Space

# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 12 English

Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 8 10 12 13 11 9 14 5 6 7 4 C F 3 2 B E A D Key 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0

* Not applicable

# Not applicable 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 13 English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button PTT Button The PTT button on the side of the microphone serves two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Making a Radio Call on page 29. Identifying Status Indicators Your radio indicates its operational status through the following:

Status Icons . page 15 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . page 17 LED Indicators . page 18 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . page 19 Alert Tones. page 20 s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 14 English Status Icons u Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. t F V N Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Call Received Radio has received an Individual Call. Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the signal. Direct On = Radio is currently configured for direct radio to radio communication (during conventional operation only). Off = Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. M K Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored (during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On = The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is activated. Off = The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is deactivated. H or . i Power Level L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 15 English j Priority-One Channel Scan Blinking dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. View/Program Mode Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady = View mode Blinking = Program mode Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. k m s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 16 English AES Secure Operation On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. Location Signal On = Location feature is enabled, and location signal is available. Off = Location feature is disabled. Blinking = Location feature is enabled, but no location signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On = User is currently associated with the radio. Off = User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data Activity Data activity is present. l G n o Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 57 for more information. Status Icons

The following icons appear on the radios display for TMS features:

Z r Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read.

I P

p q Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. 2 Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 17 English 1 3

Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode.

TMS Menu Options Menu Option Description/Function BACK DEL EDIT EXIT NO OPTN RPLY Brings you back to the previous screen. Deletes a message or text. Brings you to the edit screen. Exits to the Home screen. Returns to the previous screen. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 18 English Menu Option SEL SEND YES Description/Function Selects the highlighted command. Sends the message. Updates or saves a command. LED Indicators LED indicators show the operational status of your radio. Solid red Radio is transmitting. Rapidly blinking red Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow Channel is busy. Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Blinking green Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporary changes the radios display backlight color and the alert text background color to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight Orange Event Emergency Alerts Red Critical Alerts Green Call Alerts When The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. The radio is out of range. The radio enters failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio receives private call. The radio receives phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives selective call. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 19 English Alert Tones An alert tone is a sound or group of sounds. Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of your radios conditions. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Tone Name When Two high-pitched tones Private Conversation When a Private Call is received. Four high-pitched tones When a Call Alert page is received. Call Alert every five seconds Single, high-pitched tone Central Acknowledge When a Call Alert, emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/message transmission is received by the systems central controller. Four high-pitched tones Mobile Unit Acknowledge When a Call Alert page is received by the intended unit, or the emergency System Busy alarm, reprogram request, or status/message transmission is acknowledged by the intended dispatcher. When the PTT button is pressed, indicates transmission fail because all system radio channels are in use. Release the PTT button and wait for call back. Automatic Call Back When a channel is now available for your previously requested transmission. Talk Permit (Optional) When the PTT button is pressed, indicates the system is accepting your transmission. Scan Alert On When Scan feature is activated through the preprogrammed button. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 20 English Sound similar to a telephone busy signal A series of two short, high-pitched tones A series of two short, high-pitched tones

(same as automatic call back) A series of low-pitched tones followed by a series of high-pitched tones You Hear A series of high-pitched tones followed by a series of low-pitched tones Tone Name Scan Alert Off When Scan feature is deactivated through the preprogrammed button. I When Continuous, low-pitched tone Talk-Prohibit Smart PTT Inhibit Out-of-Range Illegal Mode Single, high-pitched tone every nine seconds Failsoft

(When the PTT button is pressed) the system is out of service.

(When the PTT button is pressed) the channel is busy with the Smart PTT feature enabled.

(When the PTT button is pressed) indicates the radio is not in the range of the trunked radio system. When you have entered a mode where normal system traffic will be missed, or you are attempting something which is not permitted. Examples include: forgetting to exit the telephone interconnect mode after a call ends (fleet and subfleet calls cannot be received), attempting to transmit on a receive-only conventional mode, attempting to select a dynamic mode where no dynamic ID assignment has been made. When a trunked system central controller failure in an unmuted receive condition. The radio reverts from trunked operation to a system similar to conventional radio repeater operation. Other system users can be heard sharing the channel. Brief low-pitched tone Time-Out Timer Warning When your present transmission will soon be disabled. Single, short, high-

pitched tone Valid Key Single, low-pitched tone Invalid Key When you pressed a valid key, or you entered a feature configuration state, or you are receiving or transmitting in the clear mode on secure models (with TX Clear Alert Tones enabled). When you tried to make an invalid key press, or that an emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/message was not acknowledged. 21 English i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s You Hear Tone Name When Unique chirping sound Gurgle Unique low-pitched chirp Unique high-pitched chirp Dynamic Reprogramming When a dynamic ID is assigned. New Message When a new message is received. Priority Message When a priority message is received. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 22 English Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts The following appears on the radios display when you make and receive Phone calls. The radio also uses alert tones to indicate the current status. You Hear You See When Notes A Long Tone A Busy Tone NO PHONE You press the PTT button and the phone system is not available. Press H to hang up. The radio returns to the Home screen. PHONE BUSY The phone system is busy. Press H to exit the phone mode and try your call later. PHONE BUSY When a channel is not available. The radio automatically connects when a channel opens. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s NO ACKNOWLED GE A High-

Pitched Tone The call is not acknowledged. Press H to hang up. The radio returns to the Home screen. When you release the PTT button. The radio indicates to the landline party that he or she may begin talking. I i n d c a t o r s Note: You have the option of sending additional digits (overdial), such as an extension number, or credit card or PIN numbers, to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for live overdial, every digit entered after the call is connected is sent to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for buffered overdial, the digits pressed are entered into memory and then sent when the PTT button is pressed. Press the PTT button to send either digits or voice, but not both at the same time. 23 English General Radio Operation Once you understand how your APX 7500 O5 CH Mobile is configured, you are ready to use your radio. Use this navigation guide to familiarize yourself with the basic Call features:

Selecting a Zone . page 24 Selecting a Radio Channel . page 25 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call. page 26 Making a Radio Call . page 27 Repeater or Direct Operation . page 30 Monitoring Features . page 30 n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 3 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed 24 English Selecting a Zone A zone is a group of channels. Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use these features. Procedure:

Using the Menu Entry ZONE:

1 > to ZONE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ZONE. The display shows the current zone and channel. 3 > or < button until the desired zone is displayed. 4 Press H or the PTT button to confirm the selected zone number. 5 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone channel. OR Using the Menu Entry ZNUP or ZNDN 1 > to ZNUP or ZNDN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ZNUP or ZNDN until the required zone appears. zone channel. Note:

Positions of the ZNUP or ZNDN softkey on the display may differ each time you release the Menu Select button. Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/

receive frequency pairs. Use the following procedure to select a channel. Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. If you select a channel that is not within the preprogrammed band, the radio indicates that it is on an unsupported frequency with both audio and visual warnings. Consult a qualified radio technician for the right choice between the following methods. Procedure:

Rotate the Channel knob until the display shows the desired channel. OR Using the Menu Entry CHAN:

1 Press and hold > and hold to scroll to CHAN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN. The display shows the current zone and mode. 3 Rotate the Channel knob to the desired channel. 4 Press H or the PTT button to confirm the channel. 5 Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. OR Using the Menu Entry CNUP or CNDN 1 > to CNUP or CNDN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNUP or CNDN until the required zone appears. 3 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone channel. Note:

Positions of the CNUP or CNDN softkey on the display may differ each time you release the Menu Select button. When the channel you want is not shown in the current zone, the radio allows you to press < or >to the zone containing the channel. Please consult a qualified technician for this option. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 25 English Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:

When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen), depending on how your radio is preprogrammed:

1 ASTRO Conventional Only:

The LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:

The display shows the caller alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 28.

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

(Trunking, Digital Mode Only) A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. These one-to-one calls between two radios are not heard by others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

When you receive a Private Call:

1 You hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows CALL RECEIVED. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 3 During the call, the display shows the caller alias (name), if it is in the call list. OR During the call, the display shows the caller ID (number), if the callers name is not in the call list. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 26 English 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 5 Press H to hang up and return to the Home screen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the CALL, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See Making a Private Call (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) on page 28.

Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

1 You hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green. The display shows PHONE CALL and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press H or the Menu Select button directly below PHON button to hang up and return to the Home screen. See Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 29 for details. Making a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone switch The Channel Knob A preprogrammed One Touch button A preprogrammed Mode Select button The Contacts list (see Contacts on page 40). Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 27 English Making a Talkgroup Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:

1 < or > to TGRP. The display shows the last-selected talkgroup. OR Rotate the Channel Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. 4 ASTRO Conventional Only:

The LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:

The LED lights up solid red. 5 Speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. See Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) on page 34 for details on setting a Talkgroup n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 28 English

Making a Private Call (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert page if there is no answer from the target radio. Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Enhanced Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to CALL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. The LED lights up solid red. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the first number of the call list. OR

< or > to the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to start the Private Call. 5 A telephone-type ringing sounds if the receiving unit is in service. The display shows CALLING...<NUMBER> or CALLING...<ALIAS>. 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. OR If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. OR If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows NO ANSWER. 8 Press H to return to the Home screen. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 55 for more information. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)

This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to PHON. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. The display shows the last transmitted phone number. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the first number of the call list. OR

< or > to the required phone number. OR Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 4 Press and release the PTT button to dial the phone number. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press the PTT button to talk. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. 8 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. See Alert Tones on page 20 for more information if your call is NOT answered. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 29 English Repeater or Direct Operation Monitoring Features The REPEATER operation increases the radios range by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The DIRECT or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to DIR. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below DIR. 3 The Dir indicator lights to show REPEATER MODE if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. OR The Dir indicator lights to show DIRECT MODE and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode

(during conventional operation only). You can repeat step 2 to toggle between the two modes. Once in Direct Mode, press PTT button to start conversation with the radios nearby. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 30 English Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allowing only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Monitor a channel to ensure the channel is clear before transmitting. Monitoring a Channel

Procedure:

Lift the microphone control head off hook. Conventional Modes Only:

1 Listen for activity on that channel. 2 Adjust the Volume Knob if necessary. 3 If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start your conversation. OR Trunked Modes Only:

1 Press the PTT button. 2 If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if you hear no tone and the t indicator lights steadily, then proceed with your message. 3 Release the PTT button to receive (listen). if you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows OUT OF RANGE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below MON momentarily to activate monitoring. The display shows MONITOR ON. 3 Press the Menu Select button to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows MONITOR OFF. MONITOR ON shown on the display indicates that the radio is monitoring. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you dont hear all channel traffic. Conventional Mode Operation

This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus you can to listen to another user active on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from talking over someone elses conversation. Note:

This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Procedure:

Take the control head off hook. (This is the same as monitor on. You hear all channel traffic.) OR 1 At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, > or < button to MON. 31 English Advanced Call Features Calling a Phone Not in the List

1 < or > to PHON. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. 3 Enter the desired phone number from the optional keypad microphone. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press H or Menu Select button directly below PHON to exit. Advanced Features Use this navigation guide to learn more about advanced features available with your radio:

Advanced Call Features . page 32 Multiple Control Head Features . page 37 Contacts . page 40 Scan Lists . page 45 Scan . page 47 Call Alert Paging . page 50 Automatic Registration Service (ARS) . page 54 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . page 57 Secure Operation . page 68 Global Positioning System (GPS) Enabled. page 71 Utilities. page 81 s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 32 English

Receiving and Making a Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call

Procedure:

1 When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blinks and the display alternates between CALL RECEIVED and the home display. 2 Press the Menu Select button below CALL within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. The display shows the alias or ID number of the sender. 3 The speaker unmutes. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press H to return to the Home screen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the CALL, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 33. Making a Selective Call

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to CALL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the last number dialed. OR

< or > to the required ID. 33 English OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. If you do not press H button to hang up, your radio will remain in Selective Call state with the other unit. You will miss all subfleet traffic and incoming phone calls.

Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. Note:

Encryption keys are slaved to talkgroups. When talkgroups are enabled, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operation on page 68 for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Selecting a Talkgroup

Procedure:

1 < or > to TGRP. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TGRP. The display shows the last talkgroup that was selected and stored. 3 < or > to PSET for the preset preprogrammed talkgroup. OR

< or > to the required talkgroup. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the corresponding talkgroup in the list. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the currently selected talkgroup and return to the Home screen. 5 If the encryption key slaved to the new talkgroup is erased, a momentary key fail tone sounds and the display shows KEY FAIL. OR If the encryption key that is slaved to the new talkgroup is not allowed, a momentary key fail tone sounds and the display shows ILLEGAL KEY. 6 Press H or the PTT button to exit. 34 English Sending a Status Call

This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Status button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to STS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below STS. 3 The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 4 < or > to the required status. OR Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 5 Press the PTT button to send the status. The display shows PLEASE WAIT. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 When the dispatcher acknowledges, four tones sound and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. OR If no acknowledgment is received, a low-pitched tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press H or the PTT button.

Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. Note:

If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, an invalid tone sounds. 35 English 4 If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows ACK RECEIVED and the radio returns to the Home screen. OR If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, a low-pitched alert tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Try again or press H to cancel and return to the Home screen. Classifying Regrouped Radios

The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories: Select Enabled or Select Disabled. Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. Procedure:

1 When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. A gurgle tone sounds and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. 2 Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped.

Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) This feature lets you notify the dispatcher that you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to RPGM. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RPGM to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. 3 The display shows REPROGRAM RQST and PLEASE WAIT. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 36 English Multiple Control Head Features Multiple Control Head Features

This feature allows a transceiver to control as many as four O5 control heads. You can use the CAN cables to connect in any configuration that does not exceed 131 feet (40 meters) in combined length. O5 Control Head Installation Manual

(HLN6947) for further information. If a keypad microphone is connected after the radio has been turned on, the radio MAY fail to detect it.

+ = K J E  

The Multiple Control Head feature consists of 2 modes:

All Active mode One Active mode Multiple Control Head (MCH) feature can be programmed via Customer Programming Software (CPS). Note:

If two or more control heads are connected to the system before enabling the MCH feature in the CPS, the radio will display EXTRA CH or CH ID # ERR. Both errors are FATAL. Setting the Initial Control Heads ID

This feature allows you to setup the control head in the Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode. During the setup, the control head are defined as Control Head Number 1, Control Head Number 2, Control Head Number 3 and Control Head Number 4. Procedure:

1 Press the Power button to power off the radio. 2 Press and hold the left-most g button and the emergency button simultaneously. 3 While continuing to depress these two buttons, press the Power button to power on the radio and the control head. 4 The radio and the control head will power on into FPP mode. The display shows control heads ID number. 5 Turn the Channel knob to change the control heads ID number. 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 above to set the ID number for the rest of the attached control heads. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 37 English All Active Mode

The All Active mode enables all connected control heads of the radio to operate concurrently with each other. When you activate a feature on one control head, the rest of the control heads will have the same activated feature and indicator on their respective display. The multiple control head feature allows only control heads of the same type to be connected. Upon power up, if a control head of a different type is connected to the radio, the radio reports the fatal error CH MISMATCH on the display of all attached control heads. Intercom Feature

The All Active mode allows you to use one of the control head to talk to the user at the other control heads. Note: Only one intercom call can be initiated at one time. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below INTC to activate the intercom feature of any of the control head. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate an intercom transmission. All control heads that are attached will receive the same intercom call. 3 The display of the control heads receiving the intercom call shows the alias/ID number of the transmitting control head. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 38 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to deactivate the intercom feature. OR Press H to deactivate the intercom feature. OR Change to other mode to deactivate the intercom feature. OR Only in Emergency channel:

pressing the Emergency button or the emergency footswitch on any control head also deactivates the intercom feature. One Active Mode

The One Active mode enables only one control head to be visibly active at a time in a two control head system. In the One Active mode, if more than two (2) control heads are present upon power up, the radio shows a fatal error EXTRA CH on the display of all attached control heads. The active control head commands the system normally. In the meantime, the inactive control head is in remote mode with its display showing REMOTE. The Volume knob, DIM, Front/Rear (F/R) softkey and Emergency buttons remain active on the inactive head, while all other controls are disabled. Emergency footswitch and VIP inputs are also still active on the inactive control head. However, VIP inputs must be connected to the head assigned ID #1. Note: Only two (2) control heads are supported in the one active mode. Transceiver Z1 ZONE CHAN PWR SQL Active Radio REMOTE F/R Non-Active Radio Follow the procedure below to toggle between the two control heads. Procedure:

Press the Menu Select button directly below F/R. OR Press the Menu Select button preprogrammed user button on the keypad microphone. Intercom Features

The intercom feature allows a user at one control head to talk to the user at the other control heads of a Multiple Control Head configuration. At any given time, when a control head being operated has priority for the intercom call, all other control heads are blocked until the active control head releases PTT button. This can be made on any attached control head. This feature only applies to control heads in the All Active mode. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below INTC to activate the intercom feature. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 Press the PTT button on the microphone of one of the control heads to initiate the audio transmission. 3 All control heads that are attached, receive the same intercom call. The display of the receiving control heads shows the alias/ID number of the transmitting control head. Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to deactivate the intercom feature. OR Press H on any control head to deactivate the intercom feature. The intercom feature also deactivates when user initiates a mode change. If the radio is on an emergency channel, 39 English pressing of the EMERGENCY button or the emergency footswitch button on any control head also deactivates the intercom feature. Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contacts manages up to 2,500 contact entries, alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to 5 IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 40 English Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Note:

Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit.

Note:

Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Use the Options Menu. 1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to the call list. The display shows Contact Alias. 3 > or < to the required subscriber alias. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 5 > or < to CALL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 6 > or < to select the call type. 7 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 8 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 9 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid green. 10 If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. OR Use the PTT button:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. 3 > or < to the required subscriber alias. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The display shows Contact Alias. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 7 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid yellow. 8 If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Adding a New Contact Entry

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the and hold Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to {NEW CONTACT} and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 The display shows NAME. Use the keypad to enter the name. Press < to move one space to the left. 41 English Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen. 6 > or < to {ADD NUMBER} and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows TYPE 1 <DEFAULT TYPE>. 7 Press Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 8 > or < to the required channel and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 9 > or < to NUMBER 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT.The display shows NUMBER 1 and a cursor appears. Use the keypad to enter the number. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 42 English 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen. 11 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE once you have finished. 12 The display shows <ENTRY> STORED, confirming that the contact entry has been added. 13 The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. Deleting a Contact Entry

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 > or < to DELETE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows <ENTRY> CONFIRM DEL?. 5 Select YES to delete the entry. The display shows <ENTRY> DELETED and the radio returns to the main screen for Contacts. OR Select NO to return to the main screen for Contacts. Adding a Contact to a Call List or Phone List

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to the entry you want to add to the call list and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 > or < to ADD TO CALLLST or ADD TO PHONLST and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 5 The display shows <ENTRY> ADDED TO CALLLST or ADDED TO PHONLST, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. 6 The radio returns to the main display for Contacts.

Editing a Contact in a Call List or a Phone List Editing an Entry Alias

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 > or < to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 5 > or < to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 6 A cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. 43 English Editing as Entry ID

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 > or < to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 5 > or < to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 6 A cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the number. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 44 English 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. Editing a Call Type

Procedure:

1 > or < to CNTS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 > or < to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 > or < to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 5 > or < to TYPE and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 6 > or < to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK to select. 7 The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/

groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio can support up to 125 different scan lists. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List

Procedure:

1 > to SCNL 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SCNL. 3 > or < to view the members on the list. 4 Press the H to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. Editing the Scan List

This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. Note:

The maximum number of members for a trunking priority monitor scan list is 50; for a conventional scan list, 30; and for a talkgroup scan list, 250. Procedure:

Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button) and proceed to Step 3. OR Move the preprogrammed Scan List Programming switch to programming position and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to SCNL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SCNL. The display shows the lists that can be changed. 3 > or < to the entry you want to edit. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below RCL to view the next member of the scan list. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 > or < to select more channels to be added or deleted. OR Use the keypad to go directly to additional channels to be added or deleted. OR 45 English Use the Channel Knob to select additional channels to be added or deleted. 6 Move the Scan List Programming switch out of programming position. OR Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. Changing the Scan List Status

Procedure:

1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button). 2 The display shows the programming mode icon and the first list member. 3 > or < to the number you want to edit. 4 Press the button or press the Menu Select button directly below SEL once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. OR Press the button or press the Menu Select button directly below SEL, one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 5 > or < to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. 46 English OR Use the keypad to go directly to that scan list member. OR Use the Channel Knob to select another scan list member. 6 Long press the Scan List Programming to switch out of programming position. OR Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. Viewing and Changing the Priority Status

Procedure:

1 At the below SEL, DEL, and RCL screen, press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to view and/or change the priority status of the currently displayed channel. OR At the below SEL, DEL, and RCL screen, press the button or press the Menu Select button directly below SEL, one or more times to view and/or change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 2 A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. OR A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. OR A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-

One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. OR No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button, or turn the preprogrammed Scan switch to the Scan on or Scan off position, to start or stop scan. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > to SCAN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SCAN. 3 The display shows SCAN OFF if scan is disabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below SCAN to enable scan. OR The display shows SCAN ON and the scan status icon if A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s scan is enabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below SCAN to disable scan. 4 The radio returns to the Home screen.

Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only) Procedure:

1 > to MON. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below MON. 3 The brief MONITOR ON display indicates that the radio is disregarding the squelch code. While scanning for activity, you can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls. Respond to these types of calls as you would normally on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed.

Transmitting While the Scan is On

Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan 47 English Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below SCAN momentarily. Deleting a Nuisance Channel

If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise

(termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. Procedure:

1 When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted,

> or < to NUIS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below NUIS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below DELETE. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan

Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select button directly below PAGE or CALL. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing H or pressing the Menu Select button below either PAGE or CALL. 48 English Restoring a Nuisance Channel

Procedure:

To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the following:

Turn scan off, then on. OR Change modes. OR Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On

While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list

(except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DYNP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press H momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. Restoring Priorities in a Scan List

Procedure:

To restore the original channel priorities in a scan list, do one of the following:

Press the Menu Select button directly below RCL. OR Turn scan off, then on. OR Change channels. OR Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Hang Up (HUB)

To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box (HUB). You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. Note:

Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. 49 English Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a call alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, OR when you press the PTT button. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Answering a Call Alert

Procedure:

1 When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tone and the green LED blinks. 2 The call received icons blinks and the display shows PAGE RECEIVED. 3 Press the PTT button to answer. OR Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 50 English See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 28 or Making a Private Call (Trunking, Digital Mode Only) on page 28 for more information on returning the call. Sending a Call Alert Page

Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and time is up. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5 of the procedure below. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to PAGE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PAGE. 3 > or < to select the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to send the page. 5 The display shows PAGING...<NUMBER> or <ALIAS>. 6 If the call alert page is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. OR If the call alert page is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. 7 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return o the main screen for Contacts. 8 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return o the main screen for Contacts. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to CALL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. 3 > or < to select the required ID, press the PTT button to initiate the call. 4 If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows SEND PAGE?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to send the call alert page. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below NO to exit the screen without sending the call alert page. 6 The display shows PAGING...<ALIAS>. 7 If the call alert page is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. OR A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s In-Call User Alert

You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Procedure:

1 Make sure you are in Home mode where the default zone and mode are being displayed. 2 > or < to scroll to the VMUT. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT or the VMut preprogrammed button again to turn the feature off and you will be able to hear to normal dispatch calls. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below VMUT or the VMut programmed button momentarily toggles between Voice mute on and Voice mute off. VOICE MUTE ON shown on the display indicates that the radio is muted to normal dispatch calls. 51 English Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Orange button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports 5 Emergency Alarms:

Emergency Call Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Silent Emergency Alarm Special Considerations for Emergencies Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. Note:

To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 52 English Sending an Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. Procedure:

1 Press preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. 2 A dispatcher acknowledgment ACK RECEIVED display follows. AND, Trunking Only:

A high-pitched tone indicates that the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 3 The radio automatically returns to normal operation. No further action is required. Sending an Emergency Call

Procedure:

1 Press preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. 2 Press the PTT button and announce your emergency. 3 After completing the emergency call, press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds. 4 The EMERGENCY display disappears, and the radio returns to normal operation. 6 The EMERGENCY display disappears, and the radio returns to normal operation.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature allows you send an Emergency Alarm to another radio. Upon acknowledgement, both radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. If the radio has both emergency call and alarm features, it automatically proceeds to the call mode after the alarm is acknowledged. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button to activate the emergency call/alarm feature. 2 The display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. 3 A high-pitched tone sounds, indicating that the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. A dispatcher acknowledgment (four high-pitched tones) follows, accompanied by an ACK RECEIVED display. 4 Press the PTT button and announce your emergency. 5 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit from the emergency state altogether. Turning the radio off also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to another radio without any audio or visual indicator. Upon acknowledgement, your radios microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the other radio without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. Note:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button to activate the silent alarm feature. 2 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit the silent alarm mode. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. 53 English ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non Server Mode Note:

The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. Selecting or Changing ARS Mode

Procedure:

1 After the zone you want is displayed, toggle until the display shows the required channel. OR

> and hold to CHAN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN. The display shows the current zone and the channel blinking. 3 > or rotate the Channel Knob to the desired channel. 4 Press H to confirm the displayed zone and channel. Special Considerations for Emergencies

If you press the emergency button while in a channel that has no emergency capability, a low-pitched tone sounds. If the unit is out of the range of the system and/or the emergency alarm is not acknowledged, a tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If you press the emergency button, then change to a mode that has no emergency capability, the display shows NO EMERGENCY and a continuous low-pitched tone sounds until a valid emergency mode is selected or until the emergency is cancelled. When an emergency is active, changing to another mode where emergency is enabled (trunked or conventional) causes an emergency alarm and/or emergency call to be active on the new mode. Automatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two

(2) modes:

s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 54 English Accessing the User Login Feature

This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example:

Text Messaging Service) will take on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. The user login feature can be accessed by selecting a menu item on the display or through a programmable button. Note:

Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters A-Z, small letters a-z, numbers 0-9, *, #, -, /

and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight (8) characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight (8) characters or more. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Logging In as a User

Procedure:

1 > to USER. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below USER. 3 The display shows the User Login screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below ID. 5 A blinking cursor appears beside ID.Use the keypad to enter a username using the keypad multi-tap function. OR

> to scroll through the list of predefined usernames. Press the Menu Select button to select a predefined username. OR Press and hold > to scroll through the list of predefined usernames at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button to select a predefined username. 6 If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows Invalid ID. Repeat Step 5. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below PIN. 7 A blinking cursor appears beside PIN. Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. 55 English Logging Out

Procedure:

1 > to LOGT. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGT. 3 Display shows the User Login Indicator icon and CLEAR PRIVATE DATA?. 4 Select YES to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary PRIVATE DATA CLEARED. OR Select NO to keep your private data. Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft and Sent folder. The next radio user will be able to access your Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number will appear as asterisks. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGN. 9 In ARS server mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, IN PPROGRESS and CNCL. OR In ARS non-server mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, LOGGED IN and LOGT. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows OFFLINE and LOGT. 10 If the username is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows LOGIN FAILED. Repeat step 5. OR If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows LOGIN FAILED. Repeat Step 7. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to cancel the login in progress screen and return to the initial user login screen. OR Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and LOGGED IN and LOGT. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 56 English Text Messaging Service (TMS) This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. There are three (3) types of text messages:

A new text message (free form message) A predefined message (quick text message) An edited quick text message The main menu consists of the following options:

Inbox Compose Drafts Sent Note:

SeeStatus Icons on page 17 for more details on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 18 for more details on each menu option. Accessing TMS Feature

Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and time is up. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS button to access the TMS feature screen. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS button to access the Inbox screen. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 > or < to scroll through the main menu options. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 57 English

Note:

Composing and Sending a New Text Message During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-

tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B->C, a->b->c. During the num lock mode, except for 1, pressing the keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message (no multi-tap). Procedure:

1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 > or < to COMPOSE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to return to the TMS feature screen. 4 > or < to TEXT MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to compose a new message. 5 A blinking cursor appears on the COMPOSE screen. Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 58 English Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN once the message is composed. 7 > or < to SEND MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 8 > or < to scroll through the address list and press the Menu Select button below SEL to select the required address. OR

> or < to {OTHER RECPNT} and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. A blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 9 Press the Menu Select button below SEND to send the message. OR Press the PTT button to send the message. 10 The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. 11 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows MSG SENT. OR If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows SEND FAILED. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 61 for more information. You can also select the SAVE TO DRAFTS option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 65 for more details. Sending a Quick Text Message

Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 > or < to COMPOSE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to return to the TMS feature screen. 4 > or < to QUICK TEXT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL for a predefined message. 5 > or < to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required message. 59 English 6 The message appears on the COMPOSE screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 8 > or < to SEND MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to send the message. 9 The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 11 > or < to SEND MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 12 > or < to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR

> or < to {OTHER RECPNT} and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. A blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 13 Press the Menu Select button below SEND to send the message. OR Press the PTT button to send the message. 14 The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. 15 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows MSG SENT. OR If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows SEND FAILED. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 61 for more information.

Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features Before sending your message, you can append a priority message and/or a request reply to your message.

Note:

Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message The Priority Message icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 58 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 > or < to MARK IMPORTANT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to indicate the message as important. 3 The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message

Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 58 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 > or < to MARK AS NORMAL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to remove the priority status from the message. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 61 English

Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 64 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 > or < to MARK AS NORMAL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to indicate the message as important. AND

> or < to NO REQ REPLY and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to request for a reply. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message

Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 58 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 > or < to MARK AS NORMAL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to indicate the message as important. AND

> or < to NO REQ REPLY and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to request for a reply. 3 The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English

Managing Text Messages Receiving a Text Message

Note: When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send back a notification that the radio has received such message. Procedure:

When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox and go to Step3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 The new message icon appears and the display momentarily shows NEW MSG. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the message. 3 The display shows alias or ID with the sender of the latest received message on top. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. Note:

> or < to read the message if fills more than one screen. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox screen and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 > or < to INBX and press the Menu Select button below SEL. 4 The display shows alias or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message. 5 > or < to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below SEL to view the message. 63 English While on the review message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN, DEL, or BACK to access the option. Select OPTN to configure the message settings. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 57 for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English Replying to a Received Text Message

Note:

The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. Procedure:

1 > or <to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below SEL to view the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RPLY to reply to a message. 3 > or < to TEXT MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. OR

> or < to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL for a predefined message. OR

> or < to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required message. 4 A blinking cursor appears on the COMPOSE screen. OR The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN once you have finished writing the message. 7 > or < to SEND MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to send the message. 8 The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. Note:

You can append a priority message and/or a request reply to your message. Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 61 for more details. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Accessing the Drafts Folder

This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Procedure:

1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 > or < to DRAFTS and press the Menu Select button below SEL. 4 The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. 5 > or < to the required text message press the Menu Select button below SEL to view the message. Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT, DEL, or BACK to access the option. Select EDIT to edit the message before sending it. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. 65 English 4 The display shows alias or ID, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. 5 > or < to the required alias or ID and press the Menu Select button below SEL to view the message. Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN, DEL, or BACK to access the option. Select OPTN to send to the message. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest text message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 57 for more information. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 > or < to SENT and press the Menu Select button below s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A SEL. 66 English Sending a Sent Text Message

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN while viewing the message. 2 > or < to SEND MESSAGE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to send the message. 3 > or < to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR

> or < to {OTHER RECPNT} and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. A blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 4 Press the Menu Select button below SEND or the PTT button to send the message. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. Note:

You can append a priority message and/or a request reply to your message. Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 61 for more details. Deleting a Text Message

Procedure:

From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen:

1 > or < to scroll through the messages. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete the current message OR Press the Menu Select button directly below CLR to delete all messages. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG on the display. 67 English Secure Operation Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. Selecting Secure Transmissions

Procedure:

Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear switch to the secure position. Note:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-

only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows CLEAR TX only. Selecting Clear Transmissions

Procedure:

Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear switch to the clear position. Note:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for secure-

only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows SECURE TX ONLY. The radio will not transmit until you set the Secure/

Clear switch to the secure position. Managing Encryption Loading an Encryption Key

Note: Refer to the key-variable loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. The radio will not transmit until you set the SECURE/

CLEAR switch to the clear position. Procedure:

1 Attach the KVL to your radio. 2 The display shows KEYLOADING, and all other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English 3 Select the required keys and press the Menu Select button directly below LOAD on the KVL. This loads the encryption keys into your radio. Selecting an Encryption Key

Procedure:

4 When the key has been loaded successfully, the radio sounds a short tone for single-key radios. OR When the key has been loaded successfully, the radio sounds an alternating tone for multikey radios. Using the Multikey Feature

This feature allows the radio to be equipped with as many as 48 different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied

(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through radio service software. In addition, you can have operator-selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. Trunked Multikey If you use your radio for both conventional and trunked applications, you have to strap your encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, you may strap a different key to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-

selectable key erasure. 1 < or > to KEY. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KEY. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 < or > to scroll through the encryption keys. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit. Note:

If the selected key is erased, a momentary keyfail tone sounds and the display shows KEY FAIL. OR If the selected key is not allowed, a momentary illegal key tone sounds and the display shows ILLEGAL KEY. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 69 English Selecting a Keyset

This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. Note: Press H, the PTT button, or the EXIT menu selection to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Procedure:

1 < or > to KSET. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KSET. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. 3 < or > to scroll through the keysets. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the newly selected keyset. 5 The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. Using the Key Zeroization Feature

This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. Procedure:

1 < or > to ERAS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ERAS. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 < or > to the desired encryption key. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below ALL to delete all keys. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below SNGL to current shown key. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below ABRT to abort this screen and return to Home screen.

Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. Procedure:

1 < or > to REKY. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below REKY. 3 Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. OR Press the PTT button again, or the H or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. 4 If the rekey operation fails, a bad-key tone sounds and the display shows REKEY FAIL. Note:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). This key must be loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. Global Positioning System (GPS) Enabled Your GPS Enabled feature uses information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the approximate geographical location of your radio, expressed as latitude and longitude. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are very difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Understanding the GPS Feature

The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites, to establish the location co-ordinates, maximizing your view of clear unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

In underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles 71 English Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Note:

Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within meters from your actual location, but sometimes further away. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note:

The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English Enhancing GPS Performance

Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, please note the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and a large amount of open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)

This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. This feature is only available when a location enabled accessory such as the GPS Antenna is used. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. Programmable Waypoints User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be deleted one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Waypoints Fixed location coordinates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destination coordinates are editable. Coordinates cannot be deleted. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit.

Note:

Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature An ON menu key may be present on the location menu if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed GPS button to toggle the Outdoor Location feature on or off. OR Follow the procedure below to turn on the GPS:

1 < or > to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. The display shows LOCATION OFF <LATITUDE>. 3 < or > to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix if you want. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below ON to turn on the GPS. The display shows PREVIOUS LOC <LATITUDE>. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below RFSH to obtain a new location fix. 6 The top line temporarily displays PLEASE WAIT while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. 7 Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current latitude. Toggle to see the longitude, time and date. The location coordinates are updated automatically every four minutes while the location signal is present. 73 English 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. OR Follow the procedure below to turn off the GPS:

1 < or > to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. The display shows PREVIOUS LOC <LATITUDE>. 3 < or > to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN to turn off the GPS. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. The radio also exits the menu if the emergency button is pressed. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A

Saving a Waypoint 74 English Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 < or > to SAVE AS WAYPNT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 3 A blinking cursor appears in the Save as waypoint screen. Use the keypad to type the alias via multi-tap. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. 5 You CURRENT LOC SAVED AS <WAYPOINT NAME> on the display. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. Viewing a Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 < or > to WAYPOINTS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Waypoints name. 4 < or > to desired waypoints name. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 6 > to VIEW. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 8 > again to view UTC and date the waypoint was detected. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to previous Waypoint screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to Location screen. OR Press H to return to Home screen. OR Press PTT button to return to Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Editing the Alias of a Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. The display shows Options screen. 2 < or > to WAYPOINTS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Waypoints screen. 4 > or < to desired waypoints. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 6 > or < to EDIT NAME. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Edit Name screen. 8 A blinking cursor appears in the Save as waypnt screen. Use the keypad to type the alias via multi-tap. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase 75 English mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. 10 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> UPDATED. 11 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint

Procedure:

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. The display shows Options screen. 2 < or > to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Waypoints screen. 3 > or < to desired waypoints. 76 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 5 > or < to EDIT Location. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Edit Name screen. 7 A blinking cursor appears in the Save as waypnt screen. Use the keypad to type the number. Press < to move to the next number/coordinates. Press > to move back to the previous number/chordates. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. 9 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> UPDATED. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

1 > or < to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. The display shows Options screen. 4 > or < to WAYPOINTS. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Waypoints screen. 6 > or < to desired waypoints. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL and then skip to step 9. 8 > or < to DELETE. The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME>

CONFIRM DEL?. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete. 10 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME>DELETED. Deleting All Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

1 > or < to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. The display shows Options screen. 4 > or < to WAYPOINTS. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Waypoints screen. 6 > or < to desired waypoints. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 8 > or < to DELETE ALL. The display shows ALL SAVED WAYP CONFIRM DEL?. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete. 10 The display shows ALL SAVED WAYP DELETED. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s

Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 > or < to DIST FRM HERE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 3 The display shows a waypoints. 77 English 4 > or < to the required waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 5 The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates.

Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the home (default) display so that you can which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English Trunking System Controls Using the Failsoft System

The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communications during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. The failsoft condition is indicated by a faint beeping tone every nine seconds (radio unsquelched) until the trunking system returns to normal operation. To continue, in Failsoft, to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. Procedure:

1 Rotate the Channel knob to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. Going Out-of-Range

OUT OF RANGE when your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. Procedure:

1 A low-pitched tone sounds. AND/OR The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and OUT OF RANGE. 2 Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until:

It locks onto a control channel. OR It locks onto a failsoft channel. OR It is turned off. SmartZone

The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Head the RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Using Site Trunking Feature

If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and SITE TRUNKING. Note: When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. 79 English Locking and Unlocking a Site

This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button to toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to SITE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SITE. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOCK to lock the site. The display shows SITE LOCKED. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below UNLK to unlock the site. The display shows SITE UNLOCKED. 4 The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. Viewing and Changing a Site

This feature allows you to view the number of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English Viewing the Current Site

Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. 2 The display momentarily shows the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator

(RSSI). Changing the Current Site

Procedure:

1 Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. 2 A tone sounds and the display momentarily shows SCANNING SITE. When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Trunked Announcement

The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. Ruthless Preemption:

When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-Ruthless Preemption:

When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-type busy tone, followed by a call back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. Initiating an Announcement

If your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls:

Procedure:

1 Press the Channel knob to locate the announcement-group mode. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 Press the microphone PTT button to initiate the announcement. Utilities Viewing Recent Calls List

This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing only) The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Procedure:

1 > or < to RCNT. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RCNT to access the Recent Calls feature screen. 3 > or < to scroll through the list. 81 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to Home screen. OR Press H or the PTT button to return to the Home screen. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Selecting the Power Level

You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Settings:

Select LOW for a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Select HIGH for a longer transmitting distance. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level Switch to toggle transmit power level between high and low power. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to PWR. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PWR. 3 The display shows LOW POWER and the low power icon. OR The display shows HIGH POWER and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile

This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. You can have up to a maximum of twelve (12) radio profiles programmed into your radio by a qualified radio technician. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Profile button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to PRFL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PRFL to access the Profiles feature screen. 3 > or < to scroll through the menu selections. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required radio profile. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the screen without making any changes. 5 The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias

This feature allows you to display or hide the radio alias (name). Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below MYID. 2 The display momentarily shows RADIO ID OFF, and the radio alias disappears from the Home screen. OR The display momentarily shows RADIO ID ON, and the radio alias appears on the Home screen. Controlling the Display Backlight

You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radios display. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

The backlight setting also affects the Menu Select buttons, the Menu Navigation buttons and the keypad backlighting accordingly. Procedure:

Press the l button to toggle the backlight off or on. OR Press any key of the keypad, the Menu Select or Menu Navigation buttons, or any programmable radio controls or buttons to turn the backlight on. Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button to turn the tones off or on. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to MUTE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below MUTE. 3 The display momentarily shows TONES OFF, indicating that the keypad tones are disabled. OR The display momentarily shows TONES ON, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the keypad tones are enabled. 83 English Turning Voice Mute On or Off

You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button to turn the feature off or on. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to VMUT. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT. 3 The display momentarily shows VOICE MUTE OFF, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the feature is disabled. OR The display momentarily shows VOICE MUTE ON, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the feature is enabled. Note:

You will hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. Procedure:

1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LEDs goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The LEDs relight and the timer resets. 3 Press the PTT button to re-transmit. The time-out timer restarts and the red LED lights up. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English Using the Time-Out Timer

This feature turns off your radios transmitter. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician.

Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. 1 Procedure:

> or < to SQL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SQL. The display shows SQUELCH XX, where XX is a squelch level setting of 0 to 15. 3 Press H to return to the selected channel. Analog Options

Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available (preprogrammed) per channel. Option Result Carrier squelch (C) You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. PL or DPL Digital Options

One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Consult your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Result A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Digital Carrier-

You hear any digital traffic. Operated Squelch (COS) Normal Squelch You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code. Selective Switch You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code and correct talkgroup. 85 English Using the PL Defeat Feature

This feature allows you to override any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed to a channel. The radio will also unmute to any digital activity on a digital channel. Procedure:

Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. You hear any activity on the channel. OR The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note: When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Using the Digital PTT ID Feature

This feature allows you to the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. Your radios ID number is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, your radios ID is sent continuously during the voice message. Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)

Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. Three variations of smart PTT are available:

Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if secure-

equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. Description You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. Quick-Key Override This feature can work in conjunction with either of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-inhibit state by quick-keying the radio. In other words, two PTT button presses within the preprogrammed time limit.

Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Radio Information IP Display Control Assignments Soft ID (If Enabled) Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the time-out timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Accessing Radio Information

This feature displays the following information of your radio:

Host Version Model Number Serial Number ESN Flash Code Flash Size CH Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Memory Size Tuning Version Processor Version RF Band Secure Version DSP Version Press H at any time to return to the Home screen. Note:

Procedure:

1 > or < to INFO. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 3 > or < to RADIO INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 The display shows the Information screen. 5 > or < to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to previous screen. OR Press H to exit and return to the home display. Viewing IP Information

This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < to INFO. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 87 English 3 > or < to IP INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 The display shows the IP info screen. 5 > or < to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to previous screen. OR Press H to exit and return to the Home display. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Viewing Control Assignments

This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. Programmable Features on page 10 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. Procedure:

1 > or <to INFO. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 3 The display shows the Control Map screen. 4 > or < to CONTROL MAP. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 88 English 6 You the Radio Info screen appears. 7 > or < to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to previous screen. OR Press H to exit and return to the Home display. Editing the Soft ID

This feature allows you to change your username. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to INFO. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 3 U or D to SOFT ID and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 The display shows the current Soft ID. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT to edit the current Soft ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. 6 A blinking cursor appears in the EDIT SOFT ID screen. Use the keypad to edit the text. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to save the new Soft ID and return to the previous screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen.

Optional External Alarms (Horn and Lights) All control heads can be equipped for external alarms (horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. Note:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. Non-Permanent Horn and Lights

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. If necessary, use the > or < button to access other available options within the menu. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to access the available options. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s), until it is turned off. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L a second time to turn off the alarm(s). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Permanent Horn and Lights

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled.The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts back to the selected mode. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L a second time to turn off the alarm(s). 89 English Changing the Selected Alarms

Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below H/L until a tone sounds and the display indicates the currently selected alarm. Press the appropriate Menu Select button right below the menu entry to review the choices until the display shows the desired alarm:

H/L HORN/LITES ON (both horn and lights) LGTS LIGHTS ON HORN HORN ON Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On

When a call is received, the vehicles horn sounds for four seconds, and/or the car lights turn on for 60 seconds. The time interval can be modified by a qualified radio technician. The display will show the type of call received (CALL, PAGE, or PHONE) and the selected mode name. Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms

Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button or any control-head button to turn off the external alarm(s). s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English 2 To rearm the horn and lights feature, press the Menu Select button H/L momentarily. Note:

Pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, PAGE or PHON will turn off the external alarm(s) and place you directly in that feature. The Volume knob and the Mode knob have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms

To turn off the external alarm(s), press the PTT button or any control head button other than the Menu Select button directly below H/L. Note:

Pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, PAGE or PHON turns off the external alarm(s) and places you directly in that feature. When the external alarm(s) are turned off, they will be automatically rearmed. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below H/L turns off the external alarm(s) and exits the horn and lights feature. To rearm the feature, press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. Note:

Note:The Volume knob and the Mode knob have no effect on the state of the external alarms. Helpful Tips The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems.

+ = K J E  

The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. l H e p f u l i T p s 91 English s p T i l u f p e H l 92 English Accessories Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed in this chapter. Contact your dealer for details. Antennas . page 92 Audio . page 93 Control Station. page 93 Footswitches and PTTs . page 94 Keypad . page 94 Microphones . page 95 Motorcycle . page 95 Mounting Solution . page 95 Power Cables . page 96 Programming/Accessory Cables . page 96 Siren . page 97 Antennas Ant roof top unity gain 800 (HAF4002_) Ant 3dB low-profile 762-870 (HAF4013_) Ant 3dB elevated feed 762-870 (HAF4014_) Ant 1/4 wave 762-870MHz (HAF4016_) Ant 3dB co-linear 762-870MHz (HAF4017_) Ant, mobile, 800/900MHz (RRA4914_) Ant 3dB mcycle 762-870MHz (HAF4015_) Ant 3dB low profilemcyc 762-870MHz (HAF4018_) Roof top, 1/4 wave 136-144MHz (HAD4006_) Roof top, 1/4 wave 144-152 MHz (HAD4007_) Roof top, 1/4 wave, 152-162 MHz (HAD4008_) Roof top, 1/4 wave, 162-174 MHz (HAD4009_) Ant 3dB, roof mt, 136-174 MHz (RAD4010AR_) Ant roof mt wb VHF 136/162 (HAD4016_) Ant roof mt wb VHF 146/174 (HAD4017_) VHF ant wideband 136-174 MHz (HAD4021_) GPS (HLN7005_) A c c e s s o r i e s 92 English Audio 7.5 Watt Speaker (water resistant) (HSN4038_) 13 Watt Speaker (motorcycle) (HSN6003_) Standard speaker 8 Ohm (HSN4031_) Standard speaker 3.2 Ohm (HSN4032_) Control Station Power supply 15A Hi power (HPN4007_) Desk tray w/speaker (HLN6042_) 110V Line cord (3060665A04) Euro cord (3060665A05) UK cord (3002120F02) Argentina cord (3085801L01) s e i r o s s e c c A 93 English Footswitches and PTTs Keypad Emergency footswitch (HLN5113_) PTT footswitch button (GLN7278_) Emergency push button (HLN5131_) Accessory PTT (RLN5926_) External alarm cable (HKN4258_) External alarm buzzer 110MA (HLN6953_) External alarm relays (HLN6969_) Auxiliary switch panel (HLN1224_) Direct Entry Keypad (DEK) (HLN1392_) DEK XTL cable adaptor (HKN6189_)

(DEK) Siren PA deck 8 button (H1336_)

(DEK) Status message deck 8 button (H1338_)

(DEK) Status message deck 16 button (H1339_) DEK 8 button (HLN1362_) DEK 24 button (HLN1363_) DEK 16 button (HLN1364_) A c c e s s o r i e s 94 English Microphones Motorcycle Motorocycle enclosure - black US (HLN1446_) Motorocycle enclosure - white US (HLN1445_) Mounting Solution Hi Power Quick Release w/ Lock ( ) Mid power Key lock (HLN6372_) Mid power Trunnion (HLN7002_) Traditional Palm Microphone (HMN1090_) Keypad Microphone (HMN4079_) Smart Visor Microphone (RMN5054_) GCAI Keypad Handset (HMN4097_) GCAI non Keypad Handset (HMN4098_) Desktop Microphone New-Design (RMN5070_) Motorcycle Microphone (HMN1089_) Microphone hang up clip (HLN9073_) HLN9073B Hang up clip,0780257N01 (HLN5391_) Motorcycle water resistant mic w/DB9 connector

(HMN1079_) HandSet/Hangup Armoured Cable w/GCAI connector

(HKN1018_) s e i r o s s e c c A 95 English Power Cables Programming/Accessory Cables 10' Power Cable Dash Mountl/Mid Power (HKN4191_) 20' Power Cable Dash Mount (HKN4192_) 100W power cable (HKN6110_) 10' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6170_) 17' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6169_) 30' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6168_) 50' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6167_) 75' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6166_) 115' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6165_) 131' Power Cable Remote Mount (HKN6164_) A c c e s s o r i e s J6 RS232 cable (HKN6122_) Audio Cable Adapter (HKN6158_) Audio Cable Data (HKN6159_) Cable Kit 6' data (HKN6160_) Cable Kit 20' data (HKN6161_) Cable Access Data USB XTL5000 (HKN6163_) USB cable (6ft) (HKN6163_) USB cable (15ft) (HKN6172_) Keyloader adaptor GCAI MMP/Hirose 1.5 cable (HKN6182_) RS232 GCAI programming cable (HKN6183_) USB GCAI-MMP programming cable (HKN6184_) CH power, spkr, audio headset jacks (HKN6187_) CH power and spkr (HKN6188_) CH VIP connector (HKN6196_) Ignition Sense Cable (3085378F01/HLN6863_) Keyload cable KVL3000 plus to Hirose (TKN8531_) 26pin connector for CHIB interface (HLN6961_) O3 Can 17' extension cable (PMLN4958_) 96 English O3 accessory cable (remote extender) V3-10331

(PMLN4959_) GCAI microphone extension cable- Potato microphone

(PMKN4033_) Hirose RS232 programming cable V3-10349 (PMLN4957_) Hirose Keyload cable V3-10184 (PMLN4956_) Hirose to Hirose extension cable V3-10413 ( ) Siren Siren (HLN1439_) Siren switchbox (HLN6819_) Siren cable (HKN6146_) Siren PA round chrome skr (TDN6251_) Siren PA Rectangular chrome (TDN6252_) Siren PA underhood-grey (TDN6253_) Siren PA round-grey (TDN6254_) s e i r o s s e c c A 97 English A c c e s s o r i e s 98 English Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Take a moment to review the following:

Special Channel Assignments. page 98 Operating Frequency Requirements. page 99 F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M i

x d n e p p A Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel

If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. 98 English Non-Commercial Call Channel

For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Channel Number Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note: Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

18 19 20

22

Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 Receive 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 A p p e n d x

i M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F 99 English Frequency (MHz) Transmit 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 Receive 157.200 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 Channel Number 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

84 85 86 87 88 Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.675 156.725

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 Receive 156.675 156.725

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M i

x d n e p p A Channel Number 24 25 26 27 28 60

62 63

65 66 67**

68 69 71 72 100 English

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only

*** Guard band Note: A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. A p p e n d x

i M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F 101 English Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. Term Conventional Definition Acknowledgment of communication. A group of characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. Tone Private-Line or Digital Private-Line. Used on conventional channels to make sure you hear only the communication meant for you. In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-

way/data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Term ACK Channel Coded Squelch Control Channel y r a s s o G l 102 English Cursor Digital Private- Line

(DPL) Coded Squelch Dispatcher Failsoft FCC Hang Up Home Display LCD Definition Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater. You share a frequency, or frequencies, with other users without the aid of a central controller to assign communication channels. Therefore, you should monitor each channel before transmitting to avoid interfering with another user who may be transmitting. A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on the display. A continuous, sub-audible data signal, transmitted with the carrier. An individual who has radio system management duties. A back-up system allowing you to communicate in a non-trunked, conventional mode should the trunked system fail. Federal Communications Commission. Disconnect. The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Liquid-Crystal Display. Term Mode Mode-Slaving Monitoring

(Conventional Operation) Page Push-To-Talk (PTT) button Repeater Definition A programmed combination of operating parameters; for example, a channel or talkgroup. Radio programmed to automatically give the proper operation for a given mode you have selected. Press a programmed monitor button to listen to another user active on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from talking over someone elses conversation. A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. The PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit (send) operation when pressed. Press this button to transmit; release it to receive. A conventional radio feature, in which you talk through a receive/transmit facility

(repeater) that re-transmits received signals in order to improve communications range and coverage. l G o s s a r y Term RF RSSI Squelch Standby Talkgroup Tone Private-Line

(PL) Coded Squelch Definition Radio Frequency. A part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). Received Signal Strength Indicator. The muting of audio circuits when received signal levels fall below a pre-determined threshold. With carrier squelch, you hear all channel activity which exceeds the radios preset squelch level. An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. An organization (or group) of radio users who communicate with each other, using the same communication path. A continuous sub-audible tone transmitted with the carrier. 103 English Term Trunking Zone Definition The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users (

Conventional). Allows radio users to share a smaller number of frequencies because a repeater, or communications path, is assigned to a talkgroup for the length of a conversation. A grouping of channels or talkgroups. y r a s s o G l 104 English Commercial Warranty and Service Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

APX 7500 O5 Control Head Product Accessories Two (1) Years One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y a n d S e r v i c e 105 English INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. C)Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

A) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. e c i v r e S d n a y t n a r r a W l a i c r e m m o C B) Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 106 English D)Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E) A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F) Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G)Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H)Freight costs to the repair depot. I) A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. J) Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K) Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

A) that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

B) that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C)should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y a n d S e r v i c e 107 English SERVICE Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for a period of three years from the date of shipment from the factory, or the date of delivery if purchased from an authorized Motorola two-

way radio dealer. For more information about ESP, contact the Motorola Radio Support Center, 2204 Galvin Drive, Elgin, IL 60123, 1-800-227-6772. e c i v r e S d n a y t n a r r a W l a i c r e m m o C 108 English Index A access 7 adjust volume 3 alert tones 19 assignable function 5 B button home 8 keypad 10 menu select 7 mode rocker 9 Push-To-Talk (PTT) 13 radio control 4 C control H home 8 I icons 14 text messaging status 16 K keypad 10 L LED indicators 17 M menu 7 mode rocker 9 P prgrammable feature 5 PTT(Push-To-Talk) 13 S status icons 14 T tones 19 U utility funtion 7 I n d e x 109 English x e d n I 110 English 2008by Motorola, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 06/09 1301 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Printed in the U.S.A.

*6875947M01*

6875947M01-A